Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-VL Series. The VFD-VL Series is
manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporates the latest
microprocessor technology available.
This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the
following safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating
manual at hand and distribute to all users for reference.
To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-VL series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
DANGER!
1.
AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before
opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage
levels.
2.
3.
4.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the
input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
5.
Ground the VFD-VL using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the
laws of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring
Diagram.
6.
7.
VFD-VL series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1-
phase motors or other purpose.
VFD-VL series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING!
1.
2.
DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive
easily damage by high-voltage.
There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components
are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not
touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.
Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.
3.
CAUTION!
1.
2.
Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight,
high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic
particles.
3.
4.
5.
Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or
electric shock.
To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the
equipment.
When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the
motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output
reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.
The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the mains
supply current capacity must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models)
6.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents.......................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................1-1
1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2
2.2 External Wiring................................................................................... 2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1 Operation Method...............................................................................3-1
3.3 Auto-tuning Operations.......................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Flow Chart...................................................................................3-4
3.3.2.1 Step 1 ..................................................................................3-5
3.3.2.2 Step 2 ..................................................................................3-7
3.3.2.3 Step 3 ..................................................................................3-9
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.........................................................................5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 Fault Code Information....................................................................... 6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to
retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be
used for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are:
CAUTION!
1.
Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.
Store within an ambient temperature range of -20 °C to +60 °C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.
DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding
environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.
6.
7.
DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and
frost.
If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher
than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation
of the electrolytic capacitors.
8.
When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places
with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.1 Receiving and Inspection
This VFD-VL AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before
shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
„ Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick
Start and CD.
„ Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.
„ Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part
number of your order.
1.1.1 Nameplate Information
Example for 15HP/11kW 230V 3-Phase AC motor drive
AC Drive Model
MODEL
INPUT
OUTPUT
:VFD110VL23A
:3PH 180-264V 50/60Hz 43A
:3PH 0-230V 47A (LIFT DUTY)
41.1A(General)
Input Spec.
Output Spec.
11kW /15HP
:0~120Hz
Output Frequency Range
Software version
Freq. Range
Version:00.90
Bar Code
Serial Number
110VL23AT7260002
1.1.2 Model Explanation
VFD 110 VL 23 A
Version Type
Mains Input Voltage
23:230V Three phase 43:460V Three phase
VFD-VL Series
Applicable motor capacity
300: 40HP(30kW)
370: 50 HP(37kW)
450: 60 HP(45kW)
550: 75HP(55kW)
055: 7.5HP(5.5kW)
075: 10 HP(7.5kW)
110: 15 HP(11kW)
150: 20HP(15kW)
750: 100 HP(75kW)
185: 25 HP(18.5kW)
220: 30 HP(22kW)
Series Name (Variable Frequency Drive)
1-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation
110VL23A T 7 26
Production number
Production week
Production year 2007
Production factory
(T: Taoyuan, W: Wujian)
230V 3-phase 15HP(11kW)
Model
If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are
any problems, please contact your distributor.
1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW(Frame C)
20-30HP/15-22kW(Frame D)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
40-100HP/30-75kW(Frame E)
Frame Power range
Models
VFD055VL23A/43A, VFD075VL23A/43A,
VFD110VL23A/43A
C
7.5-15HP (5.5-11kW)
20-30HP (15-22kW)
40-60hp (30-45kW)
40-100hp (30-75kW)
VFD150VL23A/43A, VFD185VL23A/43A,
VFD220VL23A/43A
D
E (E1)
E (E2)
VFD300VL43A, VFD370VL43A, VFD450V43A
VFD300VL23A, VFD370VL23A, VFD550VL43A,
VFD750VL43A
Please refer to Chapter 1.3 for exact dimensions.
1-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions
Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:
Air Temperature:
Relative Humidity:
-10 ~ +45°C (14 ~ 113°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
Atmosphere
pressure:
86 ~ 106 kPa
Operation
Installation Site
Altitude:
<1000m
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
Vibration:
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Temperature:
-20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
86 ~ 106 kPa
Relative Humidity:
Storage
Transportation
Atmosphere
pressure:
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
Vibration:
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Pollution Degree 2: good for a factory type environment.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
H
Air Flow
W
W
H
W
H
HP
mm (inch)
mm (inch)
7.5-20HP
25-75HP
100HP
75 (3)
75 (3)
75 (3)
175 (7)
200 (8)
250 (10)
1-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
CAUTION!
1.
Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause
damage to the AC motor drive.
2.
3.
Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions
are not allowed.
4.
5.
6.
The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit
for heat dissipation.
The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor
drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.
When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding
temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive
in a space with bad ventilation.
7.
8.
Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the
heatsink.
When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row
with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a
metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.
1.2.2 Remove Front Cover
7.5-15HP/5.5-11kW(frame C) & 20-30HP/15-22kW(frame D)
After removing the screws, please push the front cover to open it. For the open cover direction,
please refer to the following picture.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
40-100HP/30-75kW (frame E)
After removing the screws, please push the front cover to open it. For the open cover direction,
please refer to the following picture.
1.2.3 Lifting
Please carry only fully assembled AC motor drives as shown in the following.
For 40-100HP (Frame E)
Step 1
Step 2
1-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Step 3
Step 4
1.2.4 Flange Mounting
Step 1: Please take out the 16 screws (8 screws for each top and bottom side of the drive) and
remove the fixed plate 1 and fixed plate 2) as shown in the following figures.
1
2
1
2
5
6
5
6
3
4
3
4
7
7
fixed plate 1
fixed plate 2
8
8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Step 2: place the 8 screws back in to secure the fixed plate 1 and fixed plate 2 (as shown in the
following figures) with the following torque.
Frame C: 14-17kgf-cm [12.2-14.8in-lbf]
Frame D: 20-25kgf-cm [17.4-21.7in-lbf]
Frame E: 20-25kgf-cm [17.4-21.7in-lbf]
1
2
1
2
fixed plate 2
fixed plate 1
3
4
3
4
Step 3: Please notice that it doesn’t need to put those 8 screws shown in the following figures
back to the drive. Moreover, please make sure that these 2 different fixed plates are put in the
correct side as shown in the figures.
5
1
6
2
7
8
3
4
1-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
20-30HP/15-22kW (frame D)
1-12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.3 Dimensions
Frame C
W
D
W1
H3
H
H1
H2
WARNING
R
R
ead the us er manual before operation.
is of electrical hock. Wait 10 inutes after rem oving
k
s
m
power before servic ing.
not onnect AC power
and /T 3.
se proper grounding techniques.
heck to be ure that he voltage of the
he rated voltage of the
D
o
c
t
o
output terminals
U
/T1,
V/T
2
W
U
C
s
t
m
ain AC power
supply satis fies
t
I
nverter.
2
3
1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
W
W1
H
H1
H2
320
H3
D
Ø
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
235
204
350
337
136
[5.35] [0.26]
6.5
34
22
C
-
-
[9.25] [8.03] [13.78] [13.27] [12.60]
[1.34] [0.87]
NOTE
Frame C: VFD055VL23A/43A, VFD075VL23A/43A, VFD110VL23A/43A
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame D
W
D
W1
H3
H
H1
H2
WARNING
R
R
ead the us er manual before operation.
is of electrical hock. Wait 10 inutes after rem oving
k
s
m
power before servic ing.
not onnect AC power
and /T 3.
se proper grounding techniques.
heck to be ure that he voltage of the
he rated voltage of the
D
o
c
t
o
output terminals
U
/T1,
V/T
2
W
U
C
s
t
m
ain AC power
supply satis fies
t
I
nverter.
2
3
1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
D
W
W1
H
H1
H2
H3
D
Ø
Ø1
Ø2
Ø3
255.0 226.0 403.8 384.0 360.0 21.9 168.0
[10.04] [8.90] [15.90] [15.12] [14.17] [0.86] [6.61] [0.33] [1.73] [1.34] [0.87]
8.5
44
34
22
NOTE
Frame D: VFD150VL23A/43A, VFD185VL23A/43A, VFD220VL23A/43A
1-14
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame E
W
D
W1
D1
S3
D2
S2
S1
Unit: mm [inch]
Frame
E1
W
W1
H
H1
H2
D
D1
D2
S1
S2
S3
370.0 335.0
[14.57] [13.19]
589.0 560.0 260.0 132.5 18.0 13.0 13.0
18.0
-
[23.19] [22.05] [10.24] [5.22] [0.71] [0.51] [0.51] [0.71]
370.0 335.0 595.0 589.0 560.0 260.0 132.5 18.0 13.0 13.0
18.0
E2
[14.57] [13.19] [23.43] [23.19] [22.05] [10.24] [5.22] [0.71] [0.51] [0.51] [0.71]
NOTE
Frame E1: VFD300VL43A, VFD370VL43A, VFD450VL43A
Frame E2: VFD300VL23A, VFD370VL23A, VFD550VL43A, VFD750VL43A
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
This page intentionally left blank
1-16
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
After removing the front cover (see chapter 1.2.2 for details), check if the power and control
terminals are clear. Be sure to observe the following precautions when wiring.
CAUTION!
1.
Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as
indicated on the nameplate.
2.
Check the following items after finishing the wiring:
A. Are all connections correct?
B. No loose wires?
C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?
DANGER!
1.
A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and
wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC
motor drive.
2.
3.
4.
All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike
or electric shock.
Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring
and commissioning.
Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock.
2.1 Wiring
Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a
modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result.
Pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS-
485 communication.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Brake resistor
(optional)
Brake resistor/Unit(optional)
Refer to Appendix B for the use of
special brake resistor/unit
EPS
*
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
-
B2
U(T1)
V(T2)
+
+1 +2/B1
MC
NFB
U
V
Motor
R
S
T
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
IM/PM
W
W(T3)
E
E
SA
Recommended Circuit
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
RB
RC
MC
ON
MC
OFF
PG
Forward/STOP
Reverse/STOP
Factory setting:
SINK Mode
FWD
Line driver
REV
MI1
MI2
Multi-st ep 1
Multi-st ep 2
Multi-st ep 3
Multi-step 4
No function
incremental encoder
*
multifunction
terminals
MI3
PG Card (optional)
EMVL-PGABL
EMVL-PGABO
EMVL-PGH01
Factory
setting
MI4
Please refer to the
MI5
following figure for wiring
of SINK mode and SOURCE
mode.
No function
No function
No function(*1)
Digit al Signal Common
MI6
MI7
MI8(*1)
COM
Multi-function cont act out put 2 (Relay)
240VAC 3A
MRA
MRC
120VAC 3A
24VD C 3A
factory setting:
indicates that it is running
E
+10V
Power supply
+10V 20mA
MO1
Multi-function cont act out put 3
AUI1/AUI2
Mast er
(photocoupler)
48VD C 50mA
MO2
Frequency
-10 to 10V
Multi-function cont act out put 4
-10V
(photocoupler)
Power supply
-10V 20mA
MCM
Multi-function
E
Phot ocoupler Output
RA
RB
RC
ACI
Multi-function contac t
output 1 (Relay)
240VAC 3A
120VAC 3A
24VDC 3A
A
4~20mA
ACM
1:+EV
factory setting:
fault indicat ion
1
2
3
4
5
6
2:GND
3:SG-
4:SG+
5:NC
*RS-485
To communicate to PC, it needs
to use converter (VFD-USB01 or
IFD8500).
EMVL-I OD01
extension card
(optional)
6:NC
Control circuit term inals
Main circuit (pow er) terminals
Shielded leads & C able
Terminal EPS is emergency power input terminal, refer to the following figure for details.
*
For PG card, refer to Appendix B for details.
on the control board is inserted, MI8 is disabled.
*
(*1) When JP1
2-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 2 Wiring/Terminals setting for SINK(NPN) mode and SOURCE(PNP) mode
1
2
Sink (NPN) mode
Source (PNP) mode
used with internal power (+24Vdc)
used with internal power (+24Vdc)
MI1
MI2
MI8
MI1
MI2
MI8
+24V
+24V
COM
COM
3
Source (PNP) mode
used with external power
4
Sink (NPN) mode
used with external power
MI1
MI1
MI2
MI8
MI2
MI8
+24V
+24V
+
+
COM
COM
Figure 3 Apply to 1-phase UPS power supply system
Timing diagram of M.C.
(magnetic contact or)
1
AC motor drive
R/L1
Main power
2
1
1-phase UPS
or battery
3
~
2
3
S/L2
T/L3
Before inputting emergency power,
1
2
3
3
magnetic contactor
magnetic contactor
Magnetic contactor
and
are ON and
Specifications for
1-phase UPS and battery
250VDC (for 230V series)
500VDC (for 460V series)
EPS/+
EPS/-
should be OFF.
should be ON
after magnetic contactor
1
is ON.
3
Before removing battery and turn
MI1~8
COM
2
magnetic contactor
magnetic contactor
OFF.
to be ON,
and should be
To input emergency power
3
1
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 4 Apply to two batteries with main battery voltage is lower than 280Vdc
Timing diagram of M.C.
1
(magnetic contact or)
AC motor drive
Main
power
2
1
2
R/L1
48Vdc (230V Series)
96Vdc (460V Series)
3
~
S/L2
T/L3
3
Before inputting emergency power,
3
magnetic contactor 1 and
3
are ON and
EPS/+
EPS/-
1-phase UPS or battery
Specifications for
magnetic contactor
Magnetic contactor
after magnetic contactor
should be OFF.
should be ON
2
3
1-phase UPS and battery
250VDC (for 230V series)
500VDC (for 460V series)
is ON.
1
Before removing battery and turn
2
MI1~8
COM
magnetic contactor
magnetic contactor
OFF.
to be ON,
and should be
1
3
To input emergency power
low voltage level
free run
battery voltage
DC voltage
default EPS operation
frequency
mechanical brake
motor speed
error output
electromagnetic
valve
OFF
operation
command
about 1 min.
EPS detection
ON
ON
MI-COM=43
electromagnetic
valve
drive ready
MO-COM=9
ON
about 2 sec.
CAUTION!
1.
2.
The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions.
Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the
terminal.
3.
4.
Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield
wire or tube.
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it
comes in contact with high voltage.
2-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
5.
6.
7.
The AC motor drive, motor and wiring may cause interference. To prevent the equipment
damage, please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the
equipment.
When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively. To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation,
switch over any of the two motor leads.
With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high
leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. For longer motor cables use an AC output
reactor.
8.
9.
The AC motor drive, electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be
grounded separately.
Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.
10. No brake resistor is built in the VFD-VL series, it can install brake resistor for those occasions
that use higher load inertia or frequent start/stop. Refer to Appendix B for details.
11. Multiple VFD-VL units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded directly
to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no ground
loops.
grouning
terminals
Excellent
grouning
terminals
Good
grouning
terminals
Not allowed
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.2 External Wiring
Power Supply
Items
Power
Explanations
Please follow the specific power
supply requirements shown in
Appendix A.
supply
There may be an inrush current
during power up. Please check the
chart of Appendix B and select the
correct fuse with rated current. Use of
an NFB is optional.
FUSE/NFB
Fuse/NFB
(Optional)
Magnetic
contactor
Please do not use a Magnetic
Magnetic
contactor
(Optional)
contactor as the I/O switch of the AC
motor drive, as it will reduce the
operating life cycle of the AC drive.
Used to improve the input power
factor, to reduce harmonics and
provide protection from AC line
disturbances. (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC
line reactor should be installed when
the power supply capacity is 500kVA
or more and exceeds 6 times the
inverter capacity, or the mains wiring
Input AC
Line Reactor
Input AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
Zero-phase
Reactor
EMI Filter
S/L2
distance
10m.
≤
Zero phase reactors are used to
reduce radio noise especially when
audio equipment is installed near the
inverter. Effective for noise reduction
on both the input and output sides.
Attenuation quality is good for a wide
range from AM band to 10MHz.
Appendix B specifies the zero phase
reactor. (RF220X00A)
Zero-phase
Reactor
(Ferrite Core
Common
Choke)
R/L1
U/T1
T/L3
+/B1
B2
-
(Optional)
V/T2
W/T3
To reduce electromagnetic
interference, please refer to Appendix
B for more details.
EMI filter
(Optional)
Zero-phase
Reactor
Used to reduce the deceleration time
of the motor. Please refer to the chart
in Appendix B for specific Brake
Resistors.
Brake
Resistor
(Optional)
OutputAC
Line Reactor
Motor surge voltage amplitude
Output AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
depends on motor cable length. For
applications with long motor cable
(>20m), it is necessary to install a
reactor at the inverter output side.
Motor
2-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.3 Main Circuit
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection
Brake resistor
(Optional)
EPS
Non-fuse breaker
*
(NFB)
-
B2
+
+1 +2/B1
MC
Motor
R
S
T
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
E
E
Terminal Symbol
EPS (+, -)
Explanation of Terminal Function
For emergency power or backup power supply
AC line input terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase
induction motor
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
Connections for DC Choke (optional). Please remove
jumper when installation. (It is built in DC choke for
models 22kW and above)
+1, +2/B1
+2/B1, B2
Connections for Brake Resistor (optional)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
„ Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a non-fuse breaker or earth leakage
breaker to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection.
It is unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.
„ It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off
power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor
drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
„ Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks
which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
„ Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A.
„ When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor
with sensitivity of 200mA or above, and not less than 0.1-second operation time to avoid
nuisance tripping. For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current
sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above.
„ Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor
drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to
run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per
hour.
„ Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.
Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W)
„ When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the
AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors
or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by
Delta.
„ DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
„ Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals [+1, +2] for connecting DC reactor, terminals [+1, +2/B1] for connecting brake
resistor
DC reactor
Jumper
+1
„ To improve power factor and reduce harmonics connect a DC reactor between terminals
[+1, +2/B1]. Please remove the jumper before connecting the DC reactor.
2-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
„ Models above 22kW don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external
optional brake resistor.
„ When not used, please leave the terminals [+2/B1, -] open.
„ Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+2/B1] can damage the AC motor drive.
2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame C
Main circuit terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2/B1, -, B2
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD055VL23A
10-6 AWG.
(5.3-13.3mm2)
VFD110VL43A
VFD055VL43A
12-6 AWG.
(3.3-13.3mm2)
Stranded
copper only,
75oC
30kgf-cm
(26in-lbf)
VFD075VL43A
VFD075VL23A
VFD110VL23A
+/~ /~
EPS
R/L1 S/L2
T/L3
+1
+2/B1
DC+
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
MOTOR
B2
B2
POWER
DC-
8-6 AWG.
(8.4-13.3mm2)
+/~ /~
EPS
R/L1 S/L2
POWER
T/L3
+1
+2/B1
DC+
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
MOTOR
DC-
6 AWG.
(13.3mm2)
Main circuit terminals
Frame D
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2, -
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD150VL43A
8-2 AWG.
(8.4-33.6mm2)
VFD185VL43A
VFD150VL23A
4-2 AWG.
(21.1-33.6mm2)
3-2 AWG.
Stranded
copper only,
75 oC
50Kgf-cm
VFD185VL23A
VFD220VL43A
(26.7-33.6mm2)
(43.4 lbf-in)
6-2 AWG
(13.3-33.6mm2)
3-2 AWG
(26.7-33.6mm2)
VFD220VL23A
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Main circuit terminals
Frame E
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
, +1, +2, -
Models
Wire
Torque
Wire Type
VFD300VL43A
57kgf-cm
(49in-lbf)
VFD370VL43A
VFD450VL43A
VFD300VL23A
VFD370VL23A
VFD550VL43A
VFD750VL43A
Stranded
copper only,
75 oC
4-2 AWG.
(21.2-33.6mm2)
200kgf-cm
(173in-lbf)
2.4 Control Terminals
1
2
Sink /NPN Mode
Source Mode
used with internal power (+24Vdc)
MI1
MI1
MI2
MI8
MI2
MI8
+24V
+24V
COM
COM
The Position of External Terminals
DCM +E24V
Sink/Source
mode switch
RB MRC MRA
MCM FWD
MI5
MI7
COM AUI1
ACM
+10V
MI1 MI3
RC
RA
MO1
MO2 REV
MI2
MI4
MI6
MI8 AUI2
ACI
-10V
2-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Terminal symbols and functions
Factory Settings (SINK)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
ON:
RUN in FWD direction
FWD
Forward-Stop Command
Reverse-Stop Command
OFF:
Stop acc. to Stop Method
ON:
RUN in REV direction
REV
OFF:
Stop acc. to Stop Method
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
Multi-function Input 1
Multi-function Input 2
Multi-function Input 3
Multi-function Input 4
Multi-function Input 5
Multi-function Input 6
Multi-function Input 7
Multi-function Input 8
Refer to Pr.02-01 to Pr.02-08 for programming
the Multi-function Inputs.
ON: input voltage is 24Vdc (Max. 30Vdc), input
impedance is 3.75kΩ
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10μA.
MI8: when JP1 is inserted, this function is
disabled.
Common for digital inputs and used for SINK
mode
COM
Digital Signal Common
Digital Signal Common
(Source)
+E24V
+24V 80mA
Common for digital inputs and used for SINK
mode
DCM
RA
Digital Signal Common (Sink)
Multi-function Relay Output 1
(N.O.) a
Resistive Load:
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC
Inductive Load:
Multi-function Relay Output 1
(N.C.) b
RB
RC
Multi-function Relay Common
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC
Multi-function Relay Output 2
(N.O.) a
MRA
To output monitor signal, including in operation,
frequency arrival, overload and etc.
Refer to Pr.02-11~02-12 for programming
MRC
Multi-function Relay Common
+10V
-10V
Potentiometer Power Supply -10~+10VDC 20mA (variable resistor 3-5kohm)
Multi-function Output
Max. 48VDC 50mA
MCM
Common (Photocoupler)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Factory Settings (SINK)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
The AC motor drive output every monitor signal,
such as operational, frequency attained,
overload, etc. by open collector transistor. Refer
to Pr.03.01 multi-function output terminals for
details.
Multi-function Output 1
(Photocoupler)
MO1
Max: 48Vdc/50mA
MO1
~
MO2
Multi-function Output 2
(Photocoupler)
MO2
internal circuit
MCM
Analog current Input
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
250Ω
ACI circuit
12 bits
ACI
4 ~ 20mA/0~10V =
ACI
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00)
Set-up:
Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02
ACM
internal circuit
Auxiliary analog voltage input
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
2mΩ
+10V
|
-10V
AUI circuit
12 bits
AUI1/
AUI2
-10 ~ +10VDC =
AUI
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01-00)
Set-up:
Pr.03-00 ~ Pr.03-02
ACM
internal circuit
Analog control signal
(common)
ACM
Common for ACI, AUI1, AUI2
*Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire.
Analog input terminals (ACI, AUI1, AUI2, ACM)
2-12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
„ Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it
as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting
the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
„ If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect
a capacitor and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:
ACI/AUI1/AUI2
C
ACM
ferrite core
wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (FWD, REV, MI1~MI8, COM)
„ When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
Digital outputs (MO1, MO2, MCM)
„ Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams.
„ When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode
across the coil and check the polarity.
The specification for the control terminals
The Position of External Terminals
DCM +E24V
Sink/Source
mode switch
RB MRC MRA
MCM FWD
MI5
MI7
COM AUI1
+10V
ACM
MI1 MI3
RC
RA
MO1
MO2 REV
MI2
MI4
MI6
MI8 AUI2
-10V
ACI
Frame
Torque
8 kgf-cm (6.9 in-lbf)
Terminal: 0V/24V 1.6 kgf-com(1.4 in-lbf) 30-16 AWG (0.051-1.3mm2)
Wire
22-14 AWG (0.3-2.1mm2)
C, D, E
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
NOTE
Frame C: VFD055VL23A/43A, VFD075VL23A/43A, VFD110VL23A/43A
Frame D: VFD150VL23A/43A, VFD185VL23A/43A, VFD220VL23A/43A
Frame E: VFD300VL23A/43A, VFD370VL23A/43A, VFD450VL43A, VFD550VL43A, VFD750VL43A
2-14
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up
„ Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the
output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 are NOT connected to power
and that the drive is well grounded.
„ Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor
„ Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands.
„ Verify that there are no short-circuits between terminals and from
terminals to ground or mains power.
„ Check for loose terminals, connectors or screws.
„ Make sure that the front cover is well installed before applying
power.
„ Please do NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still
applied to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T even when the AC motor drive has
stopped. The DC-link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous
voltage levels, even if the power has been turned off.
3.1 Operation Method
The factory setting for operation method is set to control terminal. But it is just one of the operation
methods. The operation method can be via communication, control terminals settings or optional
digital keypad KPVL-CC01. Please choose a suitable method depending on application and
operation rule. The operation is usually used as shown in the following table.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
Operation
Command Source
Operation Method
Frequency Source
Operate from
Please refer to the communication address 2000H and 2119H settings
communication in the communication address definition.
Factory setting:
SINK Mode
Forward/STOP
FWD
REV
MI1
Reverse/STOP
Multi-st ep 1
*
Multi-st ep 2
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
Multi-step 3
Multi-st ep 4
No function
multifunction
terminals
Factory
setting
No function
No function
No function
(*1)
(*1)
MI8
Digit al Signal C ommon
Control Terminals-
COM
NOTE
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
Operate from
external signal
E
+10V
AUI1/AUI2
Master Frequency
-10 to 10V
-10V
Power supply-10V 20mA
E
ACI
A
4~20mA
ACM
on the control board is inserted, MI8 is disabled.
(*1) When JP1
KPVL-CC01
keypad
(Optional)
RUN,
STOP/RESET
key
UP/DOWN key
3-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
3.2 Trial Run
The factory setting of operation source is from external terminals.
1.
2.
Please connect a switch for both external terminals FWD-COM and REV-COM.
Please connect a potentiometer among AUI1/AUI2, +10V, -10V and ACM or apply power –10
~+10Vdc to AUI1/AUI2-ACM.
3.
4.
Setting the potentiometer or -10~+10Vdc power to less than 1V.
Make sure that all external terminal wirings are finished before applying power. After applying
power, verify that LED “READY” is ON.
5.
6.
Setting FWD-COM=ON for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse running
direction, you should set REV-COM=ON. And if you want to decelerate to stop, please set
FWD/REV-COM=OFF.
Check following items:
„ Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct.
„ Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration.
„ Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
3.3 Auto-tuning Operations
3.3.1 Flow Chart
Step 1 Basic parameter settings
Step 2 Motor tuning
Sett ing all parameters
to factory setting
Pr. 00-02
PM
Control Mode Selection
Pr.00-09
Motor ty pe
[PM/IM ]
IM
Source of the Master
Frequency C omm and
Pr. 00-14
Sett ing t he related
informat ion of PM motor
Pr.01-00~01-02
Sett ing t he relat ed
informat ion of IM motor
P r. 01 - 00~0 1-0 2
Source of the
Operation C omm and
Pr.00-15
Pr.08-01~08-04
Pr.05-01~05-04
PM Motor Auto-tuning
Pr.08-00
MI/MO terminals Settings
Pr.02-01~02-08
IM M otor Aut o-tuning
Pr.05-00
Pr.02-13~02-22
Step 3 Encoder settings
Selection of speed
feedback card
EMVL-PGABL
EMVL-PGABO
EMVL-PGH01
EMVL-PGS01
Detection of the HOME
position of Encoder
1. us ing digital k eypad
2. us ing external terminals
Encoder selection
Pr.10-00
Setting Encoder information
Pr.10-00~10-02
Step 4 Multi-step speed settings
Setting s peed, accel/decel. time and S curve
Pr.04-00~04-15
Pr.01-12~01-19
Pr.01-24~01-30
Step 5 Trial run
Trial run
Step 6 Elevator tuning
Smooth test
1. tuning as start-up
2. tuning as stop
Pr.11-00 bit0=1
Pr.11-05~11-08
3-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
3.3.2 Explanations for the Auto-tuning Steps
3.3.2.1 Step 1
Basic parameters settings
„ Make sure that Pr.00-00 (identity code of the AC motor drive) corresponds with the
nameplate indicated on the AC motor drive.
„ Make sure that all parameters are reset to factory setting (Pr.00-02 is set to 9 or 10).
Pr.00-02
0: No function
1: Read only
8: Keypad lock
Parameter Reset
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz,
220V/380V)
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz,
220V/440V)
„ Source of the Master Frequency Command: users can set by themselves (Pr.00-14)
Pr.00-14
1: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad
(KPVL-CC01)
Source of the
Master Frequency
Command
2: External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
3: Digital terminals input
„ Source of the Operation Command: users can set by themselves (Pr.00-15)
Pr.00-15
1: External terminals
Source of the
Operation
2: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad
(KPVL-CC01)
Command
„ MI/MO external terminals settings:
Refer to Pr.02-01~02-08 for setting the external input terminals MI1~MI8.
NOTE: The factory setting of Pr.02-08 is 40 (Enable drive function). Please disable this
function if you don’t need to use this function.
Settings of Pr.02-
01~02-08
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4
5: Reset
6: JOG command
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-28)
11: Reserved
12: Stop output
13: Disable auto accel./decel. function
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
Settings of Pr.02-
01~02-08
14: Reserved
15: operation speed command form AUI1
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI2
18: Emergency Stop (07-28)
19-23: Reserved
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: Reserved
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1) (Motor coasts to stop)
29-30: Reserved
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-21)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-22)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-23)
34-37: Reserved
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Enable drive function
41: Reserved
42: Mechanical brake
43: EPS function
Refer to Pr.02-13~02-22 for setting external output terminals MO1~MO10.
Settings of Pr.02-
13~02-22
0: No function
1: Operation indication
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-25)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-27)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-05~06-07)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-08~06-10)
9: Drive ready
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection (LV)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-29, Pr.02-30)
13: Overheat (Pr.06-14)
14: Brake chopper signal
15: Motor-controlled magnetic contactor output
16: Slip error (oSL)
17-18: Reserved
3-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
Settings of Pr.02-
13~02-22
19: Brake chopper output error
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication (Pr.00-15≠0)
25: Forward command
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34
31-32: Reserved
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Error output selection 1 (Pr.06-22)
36: Error output selection 2 (Pr.06-23)
37: Error output selection 3 (Pr.06-24)
38: Error output selection 4 (Pr.06-25)
39: Reserved
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
41: Reserved
3.3.2.2 Step 2
Motor tuning
„ Setting the parameters according to the motor type (PM or IM)
IM motor
„ Inputting the nameplate information on the motor into Pr.01-00~01-02 and Pr.05-01~05-
04
Pr.01-00
Maximum Output Frequency
10.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
Pr.01-01
1st Output Frequency Setting 1
(base frequency/motor rated
frequency)
Pr.01-02
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
1st Output Voltage Setting 1
(base voltage/motor rated
voltage)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
„ Motor Auto-tuning: When the Source of the Operation Command is set to digital keypad
(Pr.00-15=2, refer to step 1) and setting Pr.05-00=2
Pr.05-00
0: No function
Motor Auto tuning
1: Rolling test (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Static Test
NOTE 1: It doesn’t need to release the brake in this auto tuning operation. Please make
sure that the electromagnetic valve is ON when it is used between the AC motor drive and
motor. When Pr.05-00 is set to 2, no-load current of motor must be entered into Pr.05-05.
The warning message “Auto tuning” will be displayed on the digital keypad during tuning
until it is finished. Then, the measure result will be saved into Pr.05-06~Pr.05-09.
NOTE 2: It needs to finish motor auto tuning before measuring the angle between magnetic
field and PG origin.
PM motor
„ Control method: Please set Pr.00-09 to 8.
Pr.00-09
0: V/f Control
Control Method
1: V/f Control + Encoder (VFPG)
2: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
4: Torque control + Encoder (TQCPG)
8: FOC PM control (FOCPM)
„ Inputting the nameplate information on the motor into Pr.01-00~01-02 and Pr.08-01~08-
04
Pr.01-00
Maximum Output Frequency
10.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
Pr.01-01
1st Output Frequency Setting 1
(base frequency/motor rated
frequency)
Pr.01-02
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
1st Output Voltage Setting 1
(base voltage/motor rated
voltage)
„ Motor Auto-tuning: When the Source of the Operation Command is set to digital keypad
(Pr.00-15=2, refer to step 1) and setting Pr.08-00=2
Pr.08-00
0: No function
Motor Auto tuning
1: Only for the unloaded motor, auto measure the
Angle between magnetic field and PG origin (08-09)
2: For PM motor parameters
3: Auto measure the Angle between magnetic field and
PG origin (08-09)
3-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
NOTE 1: It doesn’t need to release the brake in this auto tuning operation. Please make
sure that the electromagnetic valve is ON when it is used between the AC motor drive and
motor. The warning message “Auto tuning” will be displayed on the digital keypad during
tuning until it is finished. Then, the measure result will be saved into Pr.08-05 and Pr.08-07.
(Pr.08-05 is Rs of Motor and Pr.08-07 is Lq of Motor)
NOTE 2: The auto tuning of the IM motor can also be dynamic measure.
NOTE 3: It doesn’t need to release the brake for the static measure.
3.3.2.3 Step 3
Encoder settings
„ Selection of speed feedback cards
Please refer to appendix B.8 for details. Delta provides 4 PG cards for user to select by
their application, including EMVL-PGABL, EMVL-PGABO, EMVL-PGH01 and EMVL-
PGS01.
PM motor
It can execute “RUN” by keypad or digital terminals:
„ Using digital keypad: setting Pr.08-00=1 and press RUN to execute “auto measure the
angle between magnetic field and PG origin”.
Please notice that if the electromagnetic valve and brake is not controlled by the AC
motor drive, please release it by manual.
„ Using external terminals: Pr.00-14=3, Pr.00-15=1 (refer to step 1). Please use
“inspection” function to execute “auto measure the angle between magnetic field and PG
origin”.
For the IM motor, it doesn’t need to detect the position of the electromagnetic pole, this
function (auto measure the Angle between magnetic field and PG origin) doesn’t have
to be executed.
Measure the angle between magnetic field and PG origin: Pr.08-00=1 or 3
Pr.08-00
0: No function
Motor Auto tuning
1: Only for the unloaded motor, auto measure
the Angle between magnetic field and PG origin
(08-09)
2: For PM motor parameters
3: Auto measure the Angle between magnetic
field and PG origin (08-09)
NOTE 1: It is recommended to set Pr.08-00 to 1 (unloaded motor) for the accurate
calculation. If it needs to execute this function with loaded motor, please balance the
carriage before execution.
NOTE 2: if it doesn’t allow balancing the carriage in the measured environment, it can set
Pr.08-00=3 for executing this function. It can execute this function with loaded motor by
setting Pr.08-00=3. It will have a difference of 15~30o by the different encoder type.
NOTE3: It will display the warning message “Auto tuning” on the digital keypad during
measuring until the measure is finished. Then, the result will be saved into Pr.08-09.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
NOTE 4: It will display “Auto Tuning Err” on the keypad when stopping by the fault of the
AC motor drive or human factor to show the failed detection. At this moment, please check
the connections of the wirings of the AC motor drives. If it displays “PG Fbk Error” on the
digital keypad, please change the setting of Pr.10-02 (if it is set to 1, please change it to 2).
If it displays “PG Fbk Loss” on the digital keypad, please check the feedback of Z-phase
pulse.
0: No function
Pr.10-00
1: ABZ
2: ABZ+Hall
PG signal type
3: SIN/COS+Sinusoidal
4: SIN/COS+Endat
5: SIN/COS
6: SIN/COS + Hiperface
„ Encoder settings: Pr.10-01~Pr.10-02
Detection for the magnetic pole position of motor
The detection method will be different by the setting of Pr.10-00 PG Signal Type.
The detection methods: (refer to Pr.10-00)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Setting 1 or 5: The AC motor drive will output short circuit to detect the position of the
electromagnetic pole. At this moment, the motor will generate a little noise.
Setting 2: The AC motor drive will detect the position of the electromagnetic pole by the
UVW signal of PG.
Setting 3: The AC motor drive will detect the position of the electromagnetic pole by the
sine signal of PG.
Setting 4: The AC motor drive will detect the position of the electromagnetic pole by the
communication signal of PG.
Reference table for tuning
Setting of PG
PG signal type
Applicable PG card
Pr.08-00=1
Pr.08-00=3
signal type
10-00=1
10-00=2
A, B, Z
EMVL-PGABO/ABL Motor will run Motor will run
A, B, Z+U, V, W
EMVL-PGABL
Motor will run Motor won’t run
Motor will run Motor will run
SIN/COS+
Sinusoidal
10-00=3
EMVL-PGH01/02
10-00=4
10-00=5
SIN/COS+Endat
SIN/COS
EMVL-PGS01
Motor will run Motor won’t run
Motor will run Motor will run
EMVL-PGH01/02
SIN/COS +
Hiperface
10-00=6
EMVL-PGS01
1~25000
Motor will run Motor won’t run
Pr.10-01
Encoder Pulse
3-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
0: Disable
Pr.10-02
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and
phase B leads in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and
phase A leads in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a
direction input. (low input=reverse direction, high
input=forward direction)
Encoder Input Type Setting
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a
direction input. (low input=forward direction, high
input=reverse direction)
5: Single-phase input
3.3.2.4 Step 4
Multi-step speed settings
„ Please confirm the total speed steps (high speed, middle speed, low speed, creep,
inspection and level auto-learning)
„ Please make sure that the setting of step speeds and the action of the corresponding
terminals of multi-function input commands are correct.
„ Setting multi-step speeds in Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-15
Zero Step Speed Frequency
1st Step Speed Frequency
2nd Step Speed Frequency
3rd Step Speed Frequency
4th Step Speed Frequency
5th Step Speed Frequency
6th Step Speed Frequency
7th Step Speed Frequency
8th Step Speed Frequency
9th Step Speed Frequency
10th Step Speed Frequency
11th Step Speed Frequency
12th Step Speed Frequency
13th Step Speed Frequency
14th Step Speed Frequency
15th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
Settings of Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-15
NOTE: It is recommended to set the max. operating frequency to the half of max. operating
frequency before confirming the setting of each step speed and the action of the
corresponding terminals of multi-function input commands.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
„ Setting the acceleration/deceleration with Pr.01-23 and the setting 08 (the 1st, 2nd
acceleration/deceleration time selection) and 09 (the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration
time selection) of multi-function input command Pr.02-01~02-08.
„ Settings of acceleration/deceleration time: Pr.01-12~Pr.01-19
Settings of Pr.01-12 to
Pr.01-19
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
Decel Time 4
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
NOTE: it is recommended to set the acceleration/deceleration time to the small value in the
trial run and execute smooth test after all the actions are correct.
„ Settings of S curve: Pr.01-24~Pr.01-30
Settings of Pr.01-24 to
Pr.01-30
S-curve for Acceleration
Departure Time S1
0.00~25.00 sec
0.00~25.00 sec
0.00~25.00 sec
0.00~25.00 sec
S-curve for Acceleration
Arrival Time S2
S-curve for Deceleration
Departure Time S3
S-curve for Deceleration
Arrival Time S4
0: Output waiting
Mode Selection when
Frequency < Fmin
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (4th output
frequency setting)
Switch Frequency for
S3/S4 Changes to S5
0.00~120.00Hz
S-curve for Deceleration
Arrival Time S5
0.00~25.00 sec
NOTE: it is recommended to set the S curve time to 0 in trial run and execute smooth test
after all the actions are correct.
3-12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
3.3.2.5 Step 5
Trial run
This step is used to trial run after finishing the settings of Step 1 to Step 4 to check if it runs
normally after executing the inspection with the loaded motor. At the same time, please also
check if the operations of multi-function output terminals is normal, such as the action of
the brake release and electromagnetic valve correspond to the host controller.
It needs to check the switch between each step speed, current value, the noise in the
carriage and noise source during operation.
3.3.2.6 Step 6
Elevator tuning
1.
Setting Pr. 11-00 to bit 0=1
Pr.11-00
Bit 0=0: disable
System control
Bit 0=1: ASR Auto tuning, PDFF enable
Bit 7=1: When position control is enabled, it doesn’t need to
set Pr.07-02 (DC Brake Current Level)
Bit 15=0: when power is applied, it will detect the position of
magnetic field again
Bit 15=1: when power is applied, it will start from the magnetic
field position of previous power failure
2.
Smooth test for general operation
„ Adjust the setting of Pr.11-05
Pr.11-05
1~300%
Inertial Ratio
„ Adjust the settings of Pr.11-06 to Pr.11-08
Settings of Pr.11-
06 to Pr.11-08
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Low-speed Bandwidth
High-speed Bandwidth
0~40Hz
0~40Hz
0~40Hz
3.
Start-up adjustment (only for PM motor)
„ Control by the zero-speed position
Setting Pr.11-00, 10-19, 10-22, 10-23, 02-29 and 10-24
Pr.11-00
Bit 0=0: disable
System control
Bit 0=1: ASR Auto tuning, PDFF enable
Bit 7=1: When position control is enabled, it doesn’t need
to set Pr.07-02 (DC Brake Current Level)
Bit 15=0: when power is applied, it will detect the position
of magnetic field again
Bit 15=1: when power is applied, it will start from the
magnetic field position of previous power failure
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
Pr.10-19
0~655.00%
Zero Speed Gain (P)
NOTE: refer to the explanations in Pr.02-32
Pr.10-22
0.000~65.535sec
Operation Time of
Zero Speed
Pr.10-23
0.000~65.535sec
Filter Time of Zero
Speed
Pr.10-24
0: after the brake release set in Pr.02-29
Time for Zero Speed
Execution
1: after the brake signal input (Pr.02-01~02-08 is set to
42)
Pr.02-29
0.000~65.000 Sec
Brake Release Delay
Time when Elevator
Starts
NOTE: When Pr.10-24=0, the zero speed control needs to be used with Pr.02-29. (refer to
the explanations in Pr.02-32)
„ Function of the preload input
Please connect the signal of the preload signal to the external terminal of the AC motor
drive (AUI1) and setting Pr.03-00=11, 07-19=1, 03-03, 03-06 and 03-09.
Pr.03-00
0: No function
Analog Input 1 (AUI1)
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control
mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4-5: Reserved
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: Preload Input
3-14
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
Pr.07-19
0: Disable
Source of Torque
Offset
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting (Pr.07-20)
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-21 to Pr.07-23)
Pr.03-03
-100.0~100.0%
Analog Input Bias 1
(AUI1)
Pr.03-06
0: Zero bias
Positive/negative Bias
Mode (AUI1)
1: Lower than bias=bias
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as
the center
4: Serve bias as the center
Pr.03-09
-500.0~500.0%
Analog Input Gain 1
(AUI1)
NOTE: Pr.03-03, 03-06 and 03-09 are used to adjust the analog input signal.
07-19: Source of torque offset
03-00~02: Analog input selections (AUI1/ACI/AUI2)
03-03~05: Analog input bias (AUI1/ACI/AUI2)
03-06~08: AUI1/ACI/AUI2 bias mode
+
Analog input
03-00~02
Analog input gain
03-09~11
Preload
07-19=1
+/-
Bias mode
03-06~08
Bias
03-03~05
4.
Setting of drive stop
Adjusting Pr.01-29, Pr.01-30 and Pr.11-06
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Operation and Start Up|
Pr.01-29
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~25.00 sec
Switch Frequency for
S3/S4 Changes to S5
Pr.01-30
S-curve for
Deceleration Arrival
Time S5
Pr.11-06
0~40Hz
Zero-speed Bandwidth
3-16
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters
The VFD-VL parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting. In most
applications, the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-
adjustment during operation.
The 14 groups are as follows:
Group 0: System Parameters
Group 1: Basic Parameters
Group 2: Digital Input/Output Parameters
Group 3: Analog Input/Output Parameters
Group 4: Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Group 5: IM Motor Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 7: Special Parameters
Group 8: PM Motor Parameters
Group 9: Communication Parameters
Group 10: Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Group 11: Advanced Parameters
Group 12: User-defined Parameters
Group 13: View User-defined Parameters
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings
ꢀ: The parameter can be set during operation.
Group 0 System Parameters
Factory
Setting
Explanation
Pr.
Settings
Identity Code of the AC
motor drive
Rated Current Display of the Read-only
AC motor drive
Read-only
#
#
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
00-00
00-01
0: No function
1: Read only
8: Keypad lock
Parameter Reset
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz,
220V/380V)
00-02
10: All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz,
220V/440V)
0: Display the frequency command value (LED F)
1: Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
2: DC BUS voltage
3: Display the output current (A)
4: Output voltage
5: Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04
0: Display output current (A)
1: Reserved
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Start-up Display Selection
ꢀ00-03
2: Display output frequency (H)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (U)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Output power factor angle (n)
6: Display output power kW(P)
7: Display actual motor speed in rpm(r)
8: Display estimate output torque kg-m (t)
9: Display PG position (G)
10: Reserved
11: Display AUI1 % (1.)
12: Display ACI % (2.)
13: Display AUI2 % (3.)
14: Display the temperature of heat sink (°C)
Content of Multi Function
Display
ꢀ00-04
15: Display the temperature of IGBT °C (T.)
16: The status of digital input ON/OFF (i)
17: The status of digital output ON/OFF (o)
18: Multi-step speed (S)
19: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.)
20: The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output (o.)
21-23: Reserved
24: Output AC voltage when malfunction (8)
25: Output DC voltage when malfunction (8.)
26: Output frequency when malfunction (h)
27: Output current when malfunction (4)
28: Output frequency command when malfunction (h.)
Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
User-Defined Coefficient K
Software Version
ꢀ00-05
00-06
Read-only
#.#
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
0 to 2: times of wrong password
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
0: No password set or successful input in Pr.00-07
1: Password has been set
Password Input
ꢀ00-07
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Password Set
ꢀ00-08
0: V/f Control
1: V/f Control + Encoder (VFPG)
2: Sensorless vector control (SVC)
3: FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
4: Torque control + Encoder (TQCPG)
8: FOC PM control (FOCPM)
Control Method
00-09
Reserved
00-10
00-11
Reserved
2~15KHz
12
○
○
○
○
○
○
Carrier Frequency
ꢀ00-12
4-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Explanation
Settings
Pr.
0: Enable AVR
1: Disable AVR
2: Disable AVR when deceleration stop
1: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPVL-CC01)
2: External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
3: Digital terminals input (Pr. 04-00~04-15)
0
1
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Auto Voltage Regulation
(AVR) Function
ꢀ00-13
Source of the Master
Frequency Command
ꢀ00-14
ꢀ00-15
Source of the Operation
Command
1: External terminals
2: RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPVL-CC01)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
60.00/
50.00
60.00/
50.00
220.0
440.0
0.50
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
01-00 Maximum Output Frequency 10.00~120.00Hz
1st Output Frequency
01-01
0.00~120.00Hz
Setting 1
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~120.00Hz
01-02 1st Output Voltage Setting 1
2nd Output Frequency
01-03
Setting 1
2nd Output Voltage Setting 230V: 0.1V~255.0V
5.0
10.0
0.50
ꢀ01-04
1
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
3rd Output Frequency
Setting 1
0.00~120.00Hz
01-05
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~120.00Hz
5.0
10.0
0.00
3rd Output Voltage Setting 1
ꢀ01-06
4th Output Frequency
Setting 1
○
○ ○
01-07
230V: 0.1V~255.0V
460V: 0.1V~510.0V
0.00~120.00Hz
0.0
0.0
0.50
4th Output Voltage Setting 1
ꢀ01-08
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
01-09 Start Frequency
Output Frequency Upper
Limit
Output Frequency Lower
Limit
120.00
○
○
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
ꢀ01-10
ꢀ01-11
0.00
○
○
○
○
3.00
2.00
3.00
2.00
3.00
2.00
3.00
2.00
1.00
1.00
6.00
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Accel Time 1
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
ꢀ01-12
ꢀ01-13
ꢀ01-14
ꢀ01-15
ꢀ01-16
ꢀ01-17
ꢀ01-18
ꢀ01-19
ꢀ01-20
ꢀ01-21
ꢀ01-22
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Accel Time 3
Decel Time 3
Accel Time 4
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
Decel Time 4
JOG Acceleration Time
JOG Deceleration Time
JOG Frequency
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~600.00 sec
0.00~120.00Hz
○
Switch Frequency between 0.00~120.00Hz
1st/4th Accel/decel
S-curve for Acceleration
Departure Time S1
S-curve for Acceleration
Arrival Time S2
S-curve for Deceleration
Departure Time S3
S-curve for Deceleration
Arrival Time S4
ꢀ01-23
ꢀ01-24
ꢀ01-25
ꢀ01-26
ꢀ01-27
0.00~25.00 sec
0.00~25.00 sec
0.00~25.00 sec
0.00~25.00 sec
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: Output waiting
1: Zero-speed operation
2: Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
Mode Selection when
Frequency < Fmin
01-28
Switch Frequency for S3/S4 0.00~120.00Hz
Changes to S5
0.00
1.00
2.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ01-29
ꢀ01-30
S-curve for Deceleration
Arrival Time S5
0.00~25.00 sec
Deceleration Time when
Operating without RUN
Command
0.00~60.00 sec
ꢀ01-31
4-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation
Control
0: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
2: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
3: RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
4: 3-wire
5: 3-wire (Line Start Lockout)
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
02-01 Multi-Function Input
Command 1 (MI1)
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: no function
1: multi-step speed command 1
(it is Stop terminal for 3-wire
operation)
2: multi-step speed command 2
02-02
2
3
4
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3: multi-step speed command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4
5: Reset
Multi-Function Input
Command 2 (MI2)
02-03
○
Multi-Function Input
Command 3 (MI3)
6: JOG command
02-04
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-28)
11: Reserved
12: Stop output
Multi-Function Input
Command 4 (MI4)
02-05
Multi-Function Input
Command 5 (MI5)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
02-06
13: Disable auto accel./decel. function
14: Reserved
15: operation speed command form AUI1
16: operation speed command form ACI
Multi-Function Input
Command 6 (MI6)
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
02-07 Multi-Function Input
Command 7 (MI7)
02-08
0
0
17: operation speed command form AUI2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
18: Emergency Stop (07-28)
19-23: Reserved
24: FWD JOG command
Multi-Function Input
Command 8 (MI8) (specific
terminal for Enable)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
25: REV JOG command
26: Reserved
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
28: Emergency stop (EF1) (Motor coasts to stop)
29-30: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-21)
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-22)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-23)
34-37: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Enable drive function
41: Reserved
42: Mechanical brake
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
43: EPS function
Digital Input Response Time 0.001~ 30.000 sec
0.005
0
ꢀ02-09
ꢀ02-10
Digital Input Operation
Direction
0 ~ 65535
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 1 RA,
RB, RC(Relay1)
11
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: No function
1: Operation indication
ꢀ02-11
ꢀ02-12
ꢀ02-13
Multi-function Output 2
MRA, MRC (Relay2)
2: Operation speed attained
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-25)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-27)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-05~06-07)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-08~06-10)
9: Drive ready
Multi-function Output 3
(MO1)
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 4
(MO2)
0
0
ꢀ02-14
ꢀ02-15
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection (LV)
11: Malfunction indication
Multi-function Output 5
(MO3)
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-29, Pr.02-30)
13: Overheat (Pr.06-14)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
14: Brake chopper signal
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 6
(MO4)
15: Motor-controlled magnetic contactor output
16: Slip error (oSL)
ꢀ02-16
17: Malfunction indication 1
18: Reserved
○
19: Brake chopper output error
20: Warning output
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 7
(MO5)
0
0
ꢀ02-17
ꢀ02-18
21: Over voltage warning
Multi-function Output 8
(MO6)
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication (Pr.00-15≠0)
25: Forward command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-function Output 9
(MO7)
0
0
0
0
ꢀ02-19
ꢀ02-20
ꢀ02-21
ꢀ02-22
Multi-function Output 10
(MO8)
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34
Multi-function Output 11
(MO9)
Multi-function Output 12
(MO10)
31-32: Reserved
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Fault output option 1 (Pr.06-22)
36: Fault output option 2 (Pr.06-23)
37: Fault output option 3 (Pr.06-24)
38: Fault output option 4 (Pr.06-25)
○
○
○
○
39: Reserved
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
○
○
○
○
○
41: Reserved
0 ~ 65535
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Multi-output Direction
ꢀ02-23
Serial Start Signal Selection 0: by FWD/REV
1: by Enable
02-24
Desired Frequency Attained
1
60.00/
50.00
2.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-25
ꢀ02-26
ꢀ02-27
ꢀ02-28
02-29
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
The Width of the Desired
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
Frequency Attained 1
Desired Frequency Attained
2
60.00/
50.00
2.00
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
The Width of the Desired
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
Frequency Attained 2
Brake Release Delay Time
when Elevator Starts
0.250
0.250
0.200
○
○
○
0.000~65.000 Sec
02-30 Brake Engage Delay Time
when Elevator Stops
0.000~65.000 Sec
0.000~65.000 Sec
Turn On Delay of Magnetic
Contactor between Drive
ꢀ02-31
and Motor
Turn Off Delay of Magnetic
Contactor between Drive
0.200
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-32
0.000~65.000 Sec
and Motor
Output Current Level Setting
for External Terminals
Output Boundary for
External Terminals
Detection Time of
Mechanical Brake
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ02-33
0~100%
0.00
0.00
ꢀ02-34
0.00~+-120.00Hz (it is motor speed when using with PG)
0.00~10.00 Sec
ꢀ02-35
4-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Analog Input 1 (AUI1)
Analog Input 2 (ACI)
Analog Input 3 (AUI2)
0: No function
1
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-00
ꢀ03-01
ꢀ03-02
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
4-5: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
7: Positive torque limit
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: Preload Input
Analog Input Bias 1 (AUI1)
Analog Input Bias 2 (ACI)
Analog Input Bias 3 (AUI2)
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-100.0~100.0%
-100.0~100.0%
-100.0~100.0%
ꢀ03-03
ꢀ03-04
ꢀ03-05
ꢀ03-06
Positive/negative Bias Mode
(AUI1)
0: Zero bias
1: Lower than bias=bias
2: Greater than bias=bias
3: The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the
center
Positive/negative Bias Mode
(ACI)
Positive/negative Bias Mode
(AUI2)
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-07
ꢀ03-08
4: Serve bias as the center
Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI1)
100.0
100.0
100.0
0.01
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-500.0~500.0%
-500.0~500.0%
-500.0~500.0%
ꢀ03-09
ꢀ03-10
ꢀ03-11
ꢀ03-12
Analog Input Gain 2 (ACI )
Analog Input Gain 3 (AUI2)
Analog Input Delay Time
(AUI1)
Analog Input Delay Time
(ACI)
Analog Input Delay Time
(AUI2)
Loss of the ACI Signal
0.00~2.00 sec
0.00~2.00 sec
0.00~2.00 sec
0.01
0.01
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-13
ꢀ03-14
ꢀ03-15
0: Disable
1: Continue operation at the last frequency
2: Decelerate to 0Hz
3: Stop immediately and display E.F.
Reserved
03-16
Analog Output Selection 1
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: Output frequency (Hz)
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (RPM)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
ꢀ03-17
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AUI1
10: ACI
11: AUI2
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19-20: Reserved
0~200.0%
Analog Output Gain 1
100.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-18
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Analog Output Value in REV 0: Absolute value in REV direction
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-19
ꢀ03-20
Direction 1
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
0: Output frequency (Hz)
Analog Output Selection 2
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (RPM)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AVI
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
10: ACI
11: AUI
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19-20: Reserved
0~200.0%
Analog Output Gain 2
100.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ03-21
ꢀ03-22
Analog Output Value in REV 0: Absolute value in REV direction
Direction 2
1: Output 0V in REV direction
2: Enable output voltage in REV direction
4-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Zero Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ04-00
ꢀ04-01
ꢀ04-02
ꢀ04-03
ꢀ04-04
ꢀ04-05
ꢀ04-06
ꢀ04-07
ꢀ04-08
ꢀ04-09
ꢀ04-10
ꢀ04-11
ꢀ04-12
ꢀ04-13
ꢀ04-14
ꢀ04-15
1st Step Speed Frequency
0.00~120.00Hz
2nd Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
3rd Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
4th Step Speed Frequency
5th Step Speed Frequency
6th Step Speed Frequency
7th Step Speed Frequency
8th Step Speed Frequency
9th Step Speed Frequency
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~120.00Hz
10th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
11th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
12th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
13th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
14th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
15th Step Speed Frequency 0.00~120.00Hz
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 5 IM Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
05-00 Motor Auto Tuning
0: No function
1: Rolling test (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
2: Static Test
40-120%
0
○
○
05-01 Full-load Current of Motor
#.##
#.##
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Rated power of Motor
0.00~655.35kW
05-02
Rated speed of Motor (rpm) 0~65535
1710
○
○
○
05-03
05-04 Number of Motor Poles
05-05 No-load Current of Motor
05-06 Rs of Motor
2~48
4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0-100%
#.##
0.000
0.000
0.0
0.000~65.535Ω
0.000~65.535Ω
0.0~6553.5mH
0.0~6553.5mH
05-07 Rr of Motor
05-08 Lm of Motor
05-09 Lx of Motor
0.0
Torque Compensation Time 0.001~10.000sec
Constant
0.020
ꢀ05-10
ꢀ05-11
ꢀ05-12
ꢀ05-13
ꢀ05-14
ꢀ05-15
ꢀ05-16
Slip Compensation Time
Constant
0.001~10.000sec
0.100
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Torque Compensation Gain 0~10
0.00
0
○
○
○
○
Slip Compensation Gain
Slip Deviation Level
0.00~10.00
○
○
○
0~1000% (0: disable)
0.0~10.0 sec
Detection Time of Slip
Deviation
1.0
0
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
Over Slip Treatment
Hunting Gain
○
○
○
○
○
○
0~10000 (0: disable)
00~1439
2000
00
ꢀ05-17
05-18 Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (Min.)
05-19 Accumulative Motor
Operation Time (day)
○
○
○
○
00~65535
0~250%
00
10
○
○
○
○
Core Loss Compensation
ꢀ05-20
4-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 6 Protection Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Low Voltage Level
160.0~220.0Vdc
320.0~440.0Vdc
180.0
360.0
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-00
ꢀ06-01
Phase-loss Protection
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
00: disable
Over-current Stall
Prevention during
Acceleration
00
○
○
○
ꢀ06-02
00~250%
Over-current Stall
Prevention during Operation 00~250%
00: disable
00
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-03
ꢀ06-04
Accel./Decel. Time Selection 0: by current accel/decel time
of Stall Prevention at
constant speed
1: by the 1st accel/decel time
2: by the 2nd accel/decel time
3: by the 3rd accel/decel time
4: by the 4th accel/decel time
5: by auto accel/decel time
Over-torque Detection
Selection (OT1)
0: disable
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-05
1: over-torque detection during constant speed operation,
continue to operate after detection
2: over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection
3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate
after detection
4: over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection
Over-torque Detection Level 10~250%
(OT1)
Over-torque Detection Time 0.0~60.0 sec
(OT1)
150
0.1
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-06
ꢀ06-07
ꢀ06-08
Over-torque Detection
Selection (OT2)
0: disable
1: over-torque detection during constant speed operation,
continue to operate after detection
2: over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection
3: over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate
after detection
4: over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection
Over-torque Detection Level 10~250%
(OT2)
Over-torque Detection Time 0.0~60.0 sec
(OT2)
150
0.1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-09
ꢀ06-10
Current Limit
0~250%
150
2
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-11
Electronic Thermal Relay
Selection
0: Inverter motor
1: Standard motor
2: Disable
○
○
○
○
06-12
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic
Heat Sink Over-heat (OH)
Warning
30.0~600.0 sec
60.0
85.0
50
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-13
ꢀ06-14
ꢀ06-15
0.0~110.0℃
Stall Prevention Limit Level 0~100% (refer to Pr.06-02, Pr.06-03)
06-16 Present Fault Record
0: No fault
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-current at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
06-17 Second Most Recent Fault
Record
06-18 Third Most Recent Fault
Record
06-19 Fourth Most Recent Fault
Record
06-20 Fifth Most Recent Fault
Record
0
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
06-21 Sixth Most Recent Fault
Record
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor over-load (EoL1)
23: Reserved
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Reserved
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input error (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: Reserved
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
60: Brake chopper error (bF)
61-62: Reserved
63: Safety loop error (Sry)
64: Mechanical brake error (MBF)
65: PGF5 hardware error
Fault Output Option 1
Fault Output Option 2
Fault Output Option 3
Fault Output Option 4
0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
0
0
0
0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-22
ꢀ06-23
ꢀ06-24
ꢀ06-25
ꢀ06-26
0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
0~65535 (refer to bit table for fault code)
PTC (Positive Temperature 0: Warn and keep operation
Coefficient) Detection
Selection
1: Warn and ramp to stop
PTC Level
0.0~100.0%
50.0
0.20
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ06-27
ꢀ06-28
Filter Time for PTC
Detection
0.00~10.00sec
48.0~375.0Vdc
96.0~750.0Vdc
0: By settings of Pr.06-22~06-25
1: By the binary setting
48.0
96.0
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
06-29 EPS Voltage
Setting Method of Fault
ꢀ06-30
Output
4-12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 7 Special Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Brake Chopper Level
230V: 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V: 700.0~900.0Vdc
0~100%
380.0
760.0
100
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-00
Brake ED Value Setting
DC Brake Current Level
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
07-01
0~100%
0
ꢀ07-02
ꢀ07-03
DC Brake Time during Start- 0.0~60.0 sec
up
DC Brake Time during
Stopping
0.0
○
○
○
○
0.0~60.0 sec
0.0
○
○
○
ꢀ07-04
ꢀ07-05
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Start-point for DC Brake
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00
50
DC Brake Proportional Gain 1~500Hz
ꢀ07-06
ꢀ07-07
ꢀ07-08
ꢀ07-09
ꢀ07-10
ꢀ07-11
Dwell Time at Accel.
Dwell Frequency at Accel.
Dwell Time at Decel.
Dwell Frequency at Decel.
Fan Control
0.00~600.00sec
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0.00~120.00Hz
0.00~600.00sec
0.00~120.00Hz
0: Fan always ON
○
1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
2: AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive stops and
fan OFF
3: Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink temperature
attained
4: Fan always OFF
Torque Command
-100.0~100.0% (Pr. 07-14 setting=100%)
0.0
2
○
○
ꢀ07-12
ꢀ07-13
Torque Command Source
0: Digital keypad (KPVL-CC01)
1: RS485 serial communication (RJ-11)
2: Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
Maximum Torque Command 0~500%
100
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-14
ꢀ07-15
Filter Time of Torque
Command
0.000~1.000 sec
0.000
07-16 Speed Limit Selection
0: By Pr.07-17 and Pr.07-18
0
○
1: Frequency command source (Pr.00-14)
Torque Mode +Speed Limit 0~120%
10
10
0
○
○
○
ꢀ07-17
ꢀ07-18
ꢀ07-19
Torque Mode-Speed Limit
Source of Torque Offset
0~120%
0: Disable
○
○
○
○
○
○
1: Analog input (Pr.03-00)
2: Torque offset setting (Pr.07-20)
3: Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-21 to Pr.07-23)
0.0~100.0%
Torque Offset Setting
0.0
○
ꢀ07-20
High Torque Offset
Middle Torque Offset
Low Torque Offset
0.0~100.0%
0.0~100.0%
0.0~100.0%
30.0
20.0
10.0
200
200
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-21
ꢀ07-22
ꢀ07-23
ꢀ07-24
ꢀ07-25
Forward Motor Torque Limit 0~500%
Forward Regenerative
Torque Limit
0~500%
Reverse Motor Torque Limit 0~500%
200
200
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-26
ꢀ07-27
Reverse Regenerative
Torque Limit
0~500%
Emergency Stop (EF) &
Forced Stop Selection
0: Coast to stop
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ07-28
1: By deceleration Time 1
2: By deceleration Time 2
3: By deceleration Time 3
4: By deceleration Time 4
5: By Pr.01-31
Time for Decreasing Torque 0.000~1.000 sec
at Stop
0.000
○
○
ꢀ07-29
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 8 PM Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Motor Auto Tuning
0: No function
0
○
08-00
1: Only for the unloaded motor, auto measure the angle
between magnetic field and PG origin (08-09)
2: For PM motor parameters
3: Auto measure the angle between magnetic field and PG
origin (08-09)
08-01 Full-load Current of Motor
40-120%
#.##
#.##
○
○
Rated power of Motor
0.00~655.35 kW
08-02
Rated speed of Motor (rpm) 0~65535
1710
○
08-03
08-04 Number of Motor Poles
2~96
4
○
○
○
○
08-05 Rs of Motor
0.000
0.0
0.000~65.535Ω
0.0~6553.5mH
0.0~6553.5mH
08-06 Ld of Motor
08-07 Lq of Motor
0.0
08-08 Reserved
08-09 Angle between Magnetic
Field and PG Origin
08-10 Magnetic Field Re-
orientation
360
0
○
○
0.0-360.0°
0: Disable
1: Enable
4-14
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 9 Communication Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Communication Address
Transmission Speed
1~254
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1
ꢀ09-00
ꢀ09-01
ꢀ09-02
4.8~115.2Kbps
9.6
Transmission Fault
Treatment
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Reserved
3: No action and no display
0.0~100.0 sec
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3
Time-out Detection
0.0
ꢀ09-03
ꢀ09-04
Communication Protocol
0: 7N1 (ASCII)
1: 7N2 (ASCII)
2: 7E1 (ASCII)
3: 7O1 (ASCII)
4: 7E2 (ASCII)
5: 7O2 (ASCII)
6: 8N1 (ASCII)
7: 8N2 (ASCII)
8: 8E1 (ASCII)
9: 8O1 (ASCII)
10: 8E2 (ASCII)
11: 8O2 (ASCII)
12: 8N1 (RTU)
13: 8N2 (RTU)
14: 8E1 (RTU)
15: 8O1 (RTU)
16: 8E2 (RTU)
17: 8O2 (RTU)
○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
13
○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Response Delay Time
0.0~200.0ms
2.0
ꢀ09-05
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
10-00 PG Signal Type
0: No function
1: ABZ
0
○
○
○
○
2: ABZ+Hall
3: SIN/COS+Sinusoidal
4: SIN/COS+Endat
5: SIN/COS
6: SIN/COS + Hiperface
10-01 Encoder Pulse
1~20000
600
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
10-02 Encoder Input Type Setting 0: Disable
1: Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads
in a reverse run command
2: Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads
in a reverse run command
3: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction)
4: Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction)
5: Single-phase input
Encoder Feedback Fault
Treatment (PGF1, PGF2)
0: Warn and keep operation
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and stop operation
2
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-03
Detection Time for Encoder 0.00~10.0 sec
Feedback Fault
Encoder Stall Level (PGF3) 0~120% (0: disable)
1.0
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-04
ꢀ10-05
115
○
○
○
○
○
Encoder Stall Detection
Time
0.0~2.0 sec
0.1
50
0.5
2
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-06
ꢀ10-07
ꢀ10-08
ꢀ10-09
Encoder Slip Range (PGF4) 0~50% (0: disable)
Encoder Slip Detection Time 0.0~10.0 sec
Encoder Stall and Slip Error 0: Warn and keep operation
Treatment
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
Mode Selection for UVW
Input
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (P) of
Zero Speed
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (I) of
Zero Speed
0: Z signal is at the falling edge of U-phase
1: Z signal is at the rising edge of U-phase
0.0~500.0%
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
10-10
100.0
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-11
0.000~10.000 sec
0.100
○
○
○
ꢀ10-12
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (P) 1
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (I) 1
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (P) 2
ASR (Auto Speed
Regulation) Control (I) 2
ASR 1/ASR2 Switch
Frequency
0.0~500.0%
100.0
0.100
100.0
0.100
7.00
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ10-13
ꢀ10-14
ꢀ10-15
ꢀ10-16
ꢀ10-17
ꢀ10-18
0.000~10.000 sec
0.0~500.0%
0.000~10.000 sec
0.00~120.00Hz (0: disable)
0.000~0.350 sec
ASR Primary Low Pass
Filter Gain
0.008
Zero Speed Gain (P)
0~655.00%e
80.00
5.00
○
○
ꢀ10-19
ꢀ10-20
Zero Speed/ASR1 Width
Adjustment
ASR1/ASR2 Width
Adjustment
Operation Time of Zero
Speed
Filter Time of Zero Speed
0.0~120.00Hz
○
○
○
○
0.0~120.00Hz
5.00
○
○
ꢀ10-21
ꢀ10-22
0.000~65.535 sec
0.000~65.535 sec
0.250
0.004
0
○
○
ꢀ10-23
ꢀ10-24
Time for Executing Zero
Speed
0: after the brake release set in Pr.02-29
1: after the brake signal input (Pr.02-01~02-08 is set to 42)
4-16
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 11 Advanced Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
Bit 0=0: no function
0
○
○
Bit 0=1: ASR Auto tuning, PDFF enable
Bit 7=0: no function
Bit 7=1: When position control is enabled, it doesn’t need to set
Pr.07-02 (DC Brake Current Level)
System Control
ꢀ11-00
Bit 15=0: when power is applied, it will detect the position of
magnetic field again
Bit 15=1: when power is applied, it will start from the magnetic
field position of previous power failure
0.10~3.00 m/s
1.00
400
1
○
○
○
○
○
○
Elevator Speed
ꢀ11-01
ꢀ11-02
ꢀ11-03
100~2000 mm
1~100
Sheave Diameter
Mechanical Gear Ratio
0: 1:1
1: 2:1
○
○
Suspension Ratio
1
ꢀ11-04
1~300%
40
10
10
10
30
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Inertial Ratio
ꢀ11-05
ꢀ11-06
ꢀ11-07
ꢀ11-08
ꢀ11-09
0~40Hz
0~40Hz
0~40Hz
0~200%
Zero-speed Bandwidth
Low-speed Bandwidth
High-speed Bandwidth
PDFF Gain Value
Gain for Speed Feed
Forward
0~500
0
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
ꢀ11-10
ꢀ11-11
ꢀ11-12
ꢀ11-13
ꢀ11-14
ꢀ11-15
Notch Filter Depth
0~20db
0
Notch Filter Frequency
0.00~200.00Hz
0.001~65.535s
50~200%
0.00
0.500
150
0.75
Low-pass Filter Time of
Keypad Display
○
○
○
○
Motor Current at Accel.
Elevator Acceleration
0.60~2.00m/s
Reserved
Reserved
11-16
11-17
11-18
Reserved
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 12 User-defined Parameters
Factory
Setting
Pr.
Explanation
Settings
ꢀ12-00
|
○
○
○
○
○
○
User-defined Parameters
Pr.00-00 to Pr.11-18
-
ꢀ12-31
4-18
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 13 View User-defined Parameters
Factory
Setting
Explanation
Pr.
Settings
13-00
View User-defined
Parameters
|
○
○
○
○
○
○
Pr.00-00 to Pr.11-18
-
13-31
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.2 Description of Parameter Settings
Group 0 User Parameters
ꢀ: This parameter can be set during operation.
00-00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive
Control
mode
Factory setting: ##
Factory setting: ##
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
Read Only
00-01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
Read Only
Pr. 00-00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated
voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following
table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor
drive correspond to the identity code.
Pr.00-01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user
can check if the AC motor drive is correct.
230V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
5.5
7.5
12
7.5
10
14
11
15
16
15
20
18
18.5
25
20
22
30
22
30
40
24
37
50
26
Rated Output Current for General
Purposes (A)
Rated Output Current for Elevators (A)
Max. Carrier Frequency
21.9
25
27.1
31
41
47
53
60
70
80
79
90
120
150
146
183
15kHz
9kHz
460V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
5.5
7.5
13
7.5
10
15
11
15
17
15
20
19
18.5
25
21
22
30
23
30
40
25
37
50
27
45
60
29
55
75
31
75
100
33
Rated Output Current for General
Purposes (A)
Rated Output Current for Elevators (A)
Max. Carrier Frequency
12.3 15.8
14 18
21
27
34
39
41
47
60
75
73
91
110 150
24
15kHz
31
91
9kHz
113
138 188
6kHz
4-20
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-02
Parameter Reset
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
8
9
No Function
Read Only
Keypad Lock
All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 220V/380V)
10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
When it is set to 1, all parameters are read only except Pr.00-00~00-07 and it can be used
with password setting for password protection.
This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault
records (Pr.06-16 ~ Pr.06-21).
50Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 50Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230V or 400V.
60Hz: Pr.01-01 is set to 60Hz and Pr.01-02 is set to 230Vor 460V.
When Pr.00-02=08, the KPVL-CC01 keypad is locked and only Pr.00-02 can be set. To unlock
the keypad, set Pr.00-02=00.
When Pr.00-02 is set to 1, Pr.00-02 setting should be set to 0 before setting to other setting.
ꢀStart-up Display Selection
00-03
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings 0
Display the frequency command value. (LED F)
Display the actual output frequency (LED H)
DC BUS voltage
1
2
3
4
5
Display the output current (A)
Output voltage
Multifunction display, see Pr.00-04
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.
00-04 ꢀContent of Multi-Function Display
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
U: Out put ECu r r ent
SEEEEEEE0. 0 Amps E
Settings
0
1
Display the output current in A supplied to the motor
Reserved
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-04 ꢀContent of Multi-Function Display
U: Ac t ual EFr eq. EE
SEEEEEEE0. 0 0HzEE
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display actual output frequency (H)
Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the
AC motor drive
U: DCEBUSEEEEEEEE
SEEEEEE2 55. 3Vol t
Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U, V,
W to the motor.
U: Out put EVol t age
SEEEEEE250. 0Vol t
Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U, V,
W to the motor.
U: Power EAng l eEEE
SEEEEEE250. 0d egE
Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V
and W to the motor.
U: Out put EPower EE
SEEEEEE0 . 00 0KWEE
Display the actual motor speed in rpm (enabled
when using with PG card).
U: Mot or ESpe edEEE
SEEEEEEEEEE0RPME
Display the estimated value of torque in kg-m as it
relates to current.
U: Tor que EEEEEEEE
SEEEEEEEE0. 0Nt - M
U: PGEFee dbac k EEE
SEEEEEEE156 7EEEE
Display PG position
10 Reserved
Display the signal of AUI1 analog input terminal in
U: AUI 1EEEEEEEEEE
SEEEEEEEE0. 3%EEE
%.
11
12
13
Range 0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (1.)
Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal in %.
Range 4~20mA/0~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (2.)
U: ACI EEEEEEEEEEE
SEEEEEEEE0. 0%EEE
Display the signal of AUI2 analog input terminal in
%.
U: AUI 2EEEEEEEEEE
SEEEEEEEE0. 3%EEE
Range -10V~10V corresponds to 0~100%. (3.)
U: Heat ESi nk EEEEE
SEEEEEEE40. 0ECEE
Display the temperature of heat sink (°C)
14
15
U: I GBTETe mp EEEEE
SEEEEEEE41. 3ECEE
Display the temperature of IGBT in °C.
U: DI EON/ OFFESt at
SEEEEEEE000 0EEEE
16 Display digital input status ON/OFF (i)
17 Display digital output status ON/OFF (o)
U: DOEON/ OFFESt at
SEEEEEEE000 0EEEE
U: Mul t i - SpeedEEE
SEEEEEEE000 0EEEE
18 Display multi-step speed
U: DI EPi n ESt at us E
SEEEEEEEFFFFEEEE
19 The corresponding CPU pin status of digital input (i.)
4-22
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-04 ꢀContent of Multi-Function Display
The corresponding CPU pin status of digital output
(o.)
U: DOEPi n ESt at us E
SEEEEEEEFFFFEEEE
20
21
|
Reserved
23
U: Er r or EVou t EEEE
SEEEEEEEE0. 0Vac E
24 Output AC voltage when malfunction (8)
25 Output DC voltage when malfunction (8.)
26 Output frequency when malfunction (h)
27 Output current when malfunction (4)
U: Er r or EVbu s EEEE
SEEEEEE2 56. 4Vdc E
U: Er r or EFou t EEEE
SEEEEEEE0. 0 0Hz EE
U: Er r or ECur r ent E
SEEEEEEE0. 0 0Amps
U: Er r or EFc mdEEEE
SEEEEEEE0. 0 0Amps
28 Output frequency command when malfunction (h.)
It is used to display the content when LED U is ON. It is helpful for getting the AC motor drive’s
status by this parameter.
U: DI EON/ OFFESt at
SEEEEEEE0086EEEE
Terminal MI8
Status
MI7
0
MI6
1
MI5
0
MI4
0
MI3
0
MI2
0
MI1
1
REV
1
FWD
0
0
0: OFF, 1: ON
MI1: Pr.02-01 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1)
MI8: Pr.02-08 is set to 8 (the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection)
If REV, MI1 and MI8 are ON, the value is 0000 0000 1000 01102 in binary and 0086H in HEX.
At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to “14” or “17”, it will display “0086” with LED U is ON on
the keypad KPVL-CC01. The setting 14 is the status of digital input and the setting 17 is the
corresponding CPU pin status of digital input. User can set to 14 to monitor digital input status
and then set to 17 to check if the wire is normal.
U: DOEON/ OFFESt at
SEEEEEEE0001EEEE
Terminal MO10 MO9 MO8 MO7 MO6 MO5 MO4 MO3 MO2 MO1 MRA RA MO10
Status
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
RA: Pr.02-11 is set to 9 (Drive ready).
After applying the power to the AC motor drive, if there is no other abnormal status, the
contact will be ON. At the meanwhile, if Pr.00-04 is set to 15 or 18, it will display 0001 with
LED U is ON on the keypad. The setting 15 is the status of digital output and the setting 18 is
the corresponding CPU pin status of digital output. User can set 15 to monitor the digital
output status and then set to 18 to check if the wire if normal.
00-05
ꢀUser Defined Coefficient K
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
Digit 4: decimal point number (0 to 3)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999
It is used digital setting method
Digital 4: decimal point number (0: no decimal point, 1: 1 decimal point and so on.)
Digit 0-3: 40 to 9999 (the corresponding value for the max. frequency).
Us er ECo ef f i ci e nt
S EEEEE00 0 0 0 EEEE
corresponding value
decimal point number
For example, if use uses rpm to display the motor speed and the corresponding value to the 4-
pole motor 60Hz is 1800. This parameter can be set to 01800 to indicate that the
corresponding value for 60Hz is 1800rpm. If the unit is rps, it can be set 10300 to indicate the
corresponding value for 60Hz is 30.0 (a decimal point).
Only frequency setting can be displayed by the corresponding value.
After setting Pr.00-05, it won’t display the unit of frequency “Hz” after returning to the main
menu.
00-06 Software Version
Control
mode
Factory setting: Read Only
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
Display
Read Only
#.##
4-24
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-07 ꢀPassword Input
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
Display
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
0~2 (times of wrong password)
The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00-08. Input the correct
password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.
After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a fault code “Password Error” will show up to force the
user to restart the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.
PROG
DATA
When forgetting password, you can decode by setting 9999 and press button
Please note that all the settings will be set to factory setting.
twice.
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
00-08 ꢀPassword Set
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
Display
1 to 9998 and 10000 to 65535
0
1
No password set or successful input in Pr. 00-07
Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 0, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00-07.
All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00-08.
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display
will show 1.
Be sure to record the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr.
00-07.
The password consists of min. 2 digits and max. 5 digits.
How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00-07:
Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00-08 (Or you can enter a new password if you
want to use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.
Password Decode Flow Chart
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Password Setting
Decoding Flow Chart
Forgetting Passwrod
00-08
00-07
00-08
Displays 01 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-08.
PROG
DATA
Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.
After entering 9999, press
twice to decode. The parameter
setti ng wil l be set to factory setting.
00-07
Correct Password
Incorrect Password
END
END
00-08
00-07
Displays 00 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00-07.
3 chances to enter the correct password.
1st time displays "01" if password is incorrect.
2nd time displays "02", if password is incorrect.
3rd time displays "P code"(blinking)
If the password was entered incorrectly after
three tries, the keypad will be locked.
Turn the power OFF/ON to re-enter the password.
00-09
Control Method
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
8
V/f control
V/f + Encoder (VFPG)
Sensorless vector control (SVC)
FOC vector control + Encoder (FOCPG)
Torque control + Encoder (TQCPG)
FOC PM control (FOCPM)
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive:
Setting 0: user can design V/f ratio by requirement and control multiple motors simultaneously.
Setting 1: User can use PG card with Encoder to do close-loop speed control.
Setting 2: To have optimal control characteristic by auto-tuning.
Setting 3: To increase torque and control speed precisely. (1:1000)
Setting 4: To increase accuracy for torque control.
4-26
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Setting 8: To increase torque and control speed precisely. (1:1000). This setting is only for
using with permanent magnet motor and others are for induction motor.
00-10
Reserved
00-11
Reserved
Unit: 1
00-12
ꢀCarrier Frequency
Control
mode
Factory setting: 12
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
2~15KHz
This parameter determinates the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
230V/460V Series
7.5-15HP
5.5-11kW
2~15kHz
20-30HP
15-22kW
2~15kHz
40-60 HP
30-45kW
02-09kHz
40-100HP
30-75kW
02~15kHz
Models
Setting Range
Factory Setting
12kHz
9kHz
6kHz
6kHz
Electromagnetic
Noise or Leakage
Current
Heat
Dissipation
Current
Wave
Carrier
Frequency
Acoustic
Noise
Significant
Minimal
Minimal
2kHz
8kHz
15kHz
Minimal
Significant
Significant
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.
00-13
ꢀAuto Voltage Regulation (AVR) Function
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
Enable AVR
Disable AVR
Disable AVR when deceleration stop
It is used to select the AVR mode. AVR is used to regulate the output voltage to the motor. For
example, if V/f curve is set to AC200V/50Hz and the input voltage is from 200 to 264VAC, the
output voltage won’t excess AC200V/50Hz. If the input voltage is from 180 to 200V, the output
voltage to the motor and the input voltage will be in direct proportion.
When setting Pr.00-13 to 1 during ramp to stop and used with auto accel./decel. function, the
acceleration will be smoother and faster.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00-14
ꢀSource of the Master Frequency Command
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
1
RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPVL-CC01)
External analog input (Pr. 03-00)
2
3
Digital terminals input (Pr.04-00~04-15)
This parameter determines the drive’s master frequency source.
00-15
ꢀSource of the Operation Command
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
1
External terminals
2
RS-485 serial communication or digital keypad (KPVL-CC01)
VFD-VL series is shipped without digital keypad and users can use external terminals or RS-
485 to control the operation command.
When the LED PU is light, the operation command can be controlled by the optional digital
keypad (KPVL-CC01). Refer to appendix B for details.
4-28
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
01-00
Maximum Output Frequency
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
10.00 to 120.00Hz
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC
motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V, 4 to 20mA and -10V to
+10V) are scaled to correspond to the output frequency range.
01-01 1st Output Frequency Setting
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
It is for the base frequency and motor rated frequency.
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. If the motor is 60Hz, the setting should be 60Hz. If the motor is 50Hz, it
should be set to 50Hz.
01-02 1st Output Voltage Setting
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings 230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 220.0
Factory Setting: 440.0
It is for the base frequency and motor rated frequency.
This value should be set according to the rated voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor
nameplate. If the motor is 220V, the setting should be 220.0. If the motor is 200V, it should be
set to 200.0.
There are many motor types in the market and the power system for each country is also
difference. The economic and convenience method to solve this problem is to install the AC
motor drive. There is no problem to use with the different voltage and frequency and also can
amplify the original characteristic and life of the motor.
01-03 2nd Output Frequency Setting
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01-04 ꢀ2nd Output Voltage Setting
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 5.0
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.01
01-05 3rd Output Frequency Setting
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.50
VF
VFPG
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
01-06 ꢀ3rd Output Voltage Setting
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
Settings
230V series
460V series
01-07 4th Output Frequency Setting
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 5.0
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 0.1
01-08 ꢀ4th Output Voltage Setting
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
Settings
230V series
460V series
0.1 to 255.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 0.0
Factory Setting: 0.0
V/f curve setting is usually set by the motor’s allowable loading characteristics. Pay special
attention to the motor’s heat dissipation, dynamic balance, and bearing lubricity, if the loading
characteristics exceed the loading limit of the motor.
For the V/f curve setting, it should be Pr.01-01≥ Pr.01-03≥ Pr.01-05≥ Pr.01-07. There is no
limit for the voltage setting, but a high voltage at the low frequency may cause motor damage,
overheat, stall prevention or over-current protection. Therefore, please use the low voltage at
the low frequency to prevent motor damage.
4-30
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
Voltage
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
1st Output
01-10
01-11
Voltage Setting 1
01-02
Frequency output
ranges limitation
2nd Output
Voltage Setting 1
01-04
Regular V/f Curve
Special V/f Curve
3rd Output
Voltage Setting 1
01-06
4th Output
Voltage Setting 1
Frequency
01-08
4th Freq.
01-07 01-09
01-05 01-03
3rd Freq.
01-01
1st Freq.
01-00
Maximum Output
2nd Freq.
Start Freq.
Frequency
V/f Curve
01-09 Start Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.50
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
mode
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
To distinguish which frequency should be start frequency, it needs to compare the value of min.
output frequency and start frequency. The larger value will be start frequency.
When min. output frequency > start frequency
When start frequency > min. output frequency
min. output
frequency
start frequency
start frequency
min. output
frequency
01-10 ꢀOutput Frequency Upper Limit
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 120.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
01-11 ꢀOutput Frequency Lower Limit
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
The upper/lower output frequency setting is used to limit the actual output frequency. If the
frequency setting is lower than the start-up frequency, it will run with zero speed. If the
frequency setting is higher than the upper limit, it will runs with the upper limit frequency. If
output frequency lower limit > output frequency upper limit, this function is invalid.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01-12 ꢀAccel. Time 1
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
01-14 ꢀAccel. Time 2
01-16 ꢀAccel. Time 3
01-18 ꢀAccel. Time 4
Control
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 3.00
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
01-13 ꢀDecel. Time 1
01-15 ꢀDecel. Time 2
01-17 ꢀDecel. Time 3
01-19 ꢀDecel. Time 4
Control
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 2.00
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
01-20 ꢀJOG Acceleration Time
01-21 ꢀJOG Deceleration Time
Control
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0.00~600.00 sec
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp
from 0Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00).
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time require for the AC motor drive to
decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01-00) down to 0Hz.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals settings. The factory settings are acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1.
The larger against torque and inertia torque of the load and the accel./decel. time setting is
less than the necessary value, it will enable torque limit and stall prevention function. When it
happens, actual accel./decel. time will be longer than the action above.
4-32
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency
01-00
Max. Output
Frequency
Frequency
Setting
Time
accel. time
decel. time
01-13,15,17,19
01-12,14,16,18
Accel./Decel. Time
01-22 ꢀJOG Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 6.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
Both external terminal JOG and key “JOG” on the keypad can be used. When the jog
command is ON, the AC motor drive will accelerate from 0Hz to jog frequency (Pr.01-22).
When the jog command is OFF, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog Frequency to zero.
The used Accel./Decel. time is set by the Jog Accel./Decel. time (Pr.01-20, Pr.01-21).
The JOG command can’t be executed when the AC motor drive is running. In the same way,
when the JOG command is executing, other operation commands are invalid except
forward/reverse commands and STOP key on the digital keypad.
Frequency
01-22
JOG frequency
01-07
4th output
frequency
01-20
01-21
JOG deceleration time
Time
setting
JOG acceleration time
JOG accel./decel. time
01-23 ꢀ Switch Frequency between 1st/4th Accel/decel
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.00
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This parameter selects the frequency point for transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1
to acceleration/deceleration time 4.
The transition from acceleration/deceleration time 1 to acceleration/deceleration time 4, may
also be enabled by the external terminals (Pr. 02-01 to 02-08). The external terminal has
priority over Pr. 01-23.
Frequency
1st Acceleration
Time
1st Deceleration
Time
01-23
1st/4th
Acceleration
/Deceleration
Freq.
4th Deceleration
Time
4th Acceleration Time
1st/4th Acceleration/Deceleration Switching
01-24 ꢀS-curve for Acceleration Departure Time S1
01-25 ꢀS-curve for Acceleration Arrival Time S2
Control
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00~25.00 sec
01-26 ꢀS-curve for Deceleration Departure Time S3
01-27 ꢀS-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time S4
01-30 ꢀS-curve for Deceleration Arrival Time S5
Control
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 1.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00~25.00 sec
It is used to give the smoothest transition between speed changes. The accel./decel. curve
can adjust the S-curve of the accel./decel. When it is enabled, the drive will have different
accel./decel. curve by the accel./decel. time.
The Actual Accel. Time = selected accel. Time + (Pr.01-24 + Pr.01-25)/2
The Actual Decel. Time = selected decel. Time + (Pr.01-26 + Pr.01-27 + Pr.01-30*2)/2
4-34
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency
01-26
01-25
Time
01-24
01-27
01-29 ꢀ Switch Frequency for S3/S4 Changes to S5
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.00
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00~120.00Hz
It is used to set the switch frequency between S4 and S5 for smooth stop.
It is recommended to set this parameter to the leveling speed of elevator.
Frequency
01-26=S3
01-25=S2
01-13
decel. time
01-12
accel. time
01-29
Switch frequency
for S3/S4 changes
to S5
01-27=S4
01-30=S5
Time
01-24=S1
01-28
Mode Selection when Frequency< Fmin
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0
1
Output Waiting
Zero-speed operation
2
Fmin (4th output frequency setting)
When the AC motor drive is at 0Hz, it will operate by this parameter.
When it is set to 1 or 2, voltage will be output by Fmin corresponding output voltage.
ꢀ Deceleration Time when Operating without RUN
Command
01-31
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 2.00
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00~600.00 Sec
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The AC motor drive will stop by the setting of this parameter when canceling RUN command.
Refer to the figure in Pr.01-29 for details.
4-36
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 2 Digital Input/Output Parameters
02-00 2-wire/3-wire Operation Control
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
FWD/STOP, REV/STOP (Line Start Lockout)
RUN/STOP, REV/FWD
RUN/STOP, REV/FWD (Line Start Lockout)
3-wire
3-wire (Line Start Lockout)
Three of the six methods include a “Line Start Lockout” feature. When line start lockout is
enabled, the drive will not run once applying the power. The Line Start Lockout feature doesn’t
guarantee the motor will never start under this condition. It is possible the motor may be set in
motion by a malfunctioning switch.
This parameter is used to control operation from external terminals. There are three different
control modes.
02-00
Control Circuits of the External Terminal
0, 1
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
FWD/STOP
2-wire operation control (1)
("CLOSE":FWD)
REV/STOP
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
REV:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-VL
2, 3
FWD:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
RUN/STOP
FWD/REV
2-wire operation control (2)
REV:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
RUN/STOP
REV/FWD
DCM
VFD-VL
4, 5
FWD "CLOSE":RUN
MI1 "OPEN":STOP
3-wire operation control
RUN
STOP
REV/FWD "OPEN": FWD
"CLOSE": REV
REV/FWD
DCM
VFD-VL
Multi-Function Input Command 1 (MI1)
(it is Stop terminal for 3-wire operation)
02-01
Factory Setting: 1
4-37
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02-02 Multi-Function Input Command 2 (MI2)
Factory Setting: 2
Factory Setting: 3
Factory Setting: 4
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
02-03 Multi-Function Input Command 3 (MI3)
02-04 Multi-Function Input Command 4 (MI4)
02-05 Multi-Function Input Command 5 (MI5)
02-06 Multi-Function Input Command 6 (MI6)
02-07 Multi-Function Input Command 7 (MI7)
Multi-Function Input Command 8 (MI8)
02-08
(specific terminal for Enable)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0-43
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: no function
○
1: multi-step speed command 1
2: multi-step speed command 2
3: multi-step speed command 3
4: multi-step speed command 4
5: Reset
○
○
○
○
○
○
6: JOG command
○
7: acceleration/deceleration speed inhibit
8: the 1st, 2nd acceleration/deceleration time selection
9: the 3rd, 4th acceleration/deceleration time selection
10: EF input (07-28)
○
○
○
○
○
11: Reserved
12: Stop output
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
13: Disable auto accel./decel. function
14: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
15: operation speed command form AUI1
16: operation speed command form ACI
17: operation speed command form AUI2
18: Emergency Stop (07-28)
19-23: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
24: FWD JOG command
25: REV JOG command
26: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
27: ASR1/ASR2 selection
○
○
28: Emergency stop (EF1) (Motor coasts to stop)
29-30: Reserved
31: High torque bias (by Pr.07-21)
○
○
○
○
○
4-38
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
○
○
○
32: Middle torque bias (by Pr.07-22)
33: Low torque bias (by Pr.07-23)
34-37: Reserved
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
38: Disable write EEPROM function
39: Torque command direction
40: Enable drive function
41: Reserved
42: Mechanical brake
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
43: EPS function
This parameter selects the functions for each multi-function terminal.
If Pr.02-00 is set to 3-wire operation control. Terminal MI1 is for STOP terminal. Therefore, MI1
is not allowed for any other operation.
Settings
Functions
No Function
Descriptions
0
Multi-step speed
command 1
1
2
3
4
Multi-step speed
command 2
15 step speeds could be conducted through the digital
statuses of the 4 terminals, and 17 in total if the master
speed and JOG are included. (Refer to Pr. 04-00~04-14)
Multi-step speed
command 3
Multi-step speed
command 4
After the error of the drive is eliminated, use this
terminal to reset the drive.
5
6
Reset
JOG Command
JOG operation
When this function is enabled, acceleration and
deceleration is stopped and the AC motor drive starts
to accel./decel. from the inhibit point.
Acceleration/deceleration
Speed Inhibit
7
8
The 1st, 2nd acceleration The acceleration/deceleration time of the drive could
or deceleration time
selection
be selected from this function or the digital statuses of
the terminals; there are 4 acceleration/deceleration
speeds in total for selection.
The 3rd, 4th acceleration
or deceleration time
selection
9
External fault input terminal and decelerates by Pr.07-
28. (EF fault will be recorded)
10
EF Input
11
12
Reserved
Stop output
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Disable auto
accel./decel. function
13
14
15
It is used to disable auto accel./decal. function.
Reserved
Operation speed
command form AUI1
When this function is enabled, the source of the
frequency will force to be AUI1.
Operation speed
command form ACI
When this function is enabled, the source of the
frequency will force to be ACI.
16
17
18
Operation speed
command form AUI2
When this function is enabled, the source of the
frequency will force to be AUI2.
When this function is enabled, the drive will ramp to stop
by Pr.07-28 setting.
Emergency Stop
19-23 Reserved
When this function is enabled, the drive will execute
forward Jog command.
24
FWD JOG command
When this function is enabled, the drive will execute
reverse Jog command.
25
26
REV JOG command
Reserved
ON: speed will be adjusted by ASR 2 setting.
OFF: speed will be adjusted by ASR 1 setting.
27
28
ASR1/ASR2 selection
Emergency stop (EF1)
(Motor coasts to stop)
When it is ON, the drive will execute emergency stop. (it
will have fault code record)
29-30 Reserved
High torque bias (by
Pr.07-21)
The high torque bias is according to the Pr.07-21
setting.
31
32
33
Middle torque bias (by
Pr.07-22)
The middle torque bias is according to the Pr.07-22
setting.
Low torque bias (by
Pr.07-23)
The low torque bias is according to the Pr.07-23 setting.
34-37 Reserved
Disable write EEPROM When this function is enabled, you can’t write into
38
39
function
EEPROM.
Torque command
direction
When the torque command source is ACI, it can change
torque direction by enabling this function.
When this function is enabled, the drive function can be
executed. This function can be used with multi-function
output (setting Pr.02-11~Pr.02-14 to 15) and (Pr.02-31
and Pr.02-32).
40
Enable drive function
4-40
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Reserved
Descriptions
41
When drive receives RUN command, the corresponding
output terminal (setting 12) will be enabled after Pr.02-
29 time. It will check if this function is enabled within the
detection time (Pr.02-35). If NOT, the fault of mechanical
brake occurs and fault code “MBF” will be displayed.
42
43
Mechanical brake
If power is cut during running, the drive will stop when
DC bus voltage is less than low voltage level. After
power is cut, drive will run by the frequency depend on
EPS when EPS is applied and this function is ON.
EPS function
Frequency
07-03
07-04
Time
frequency
output
operation
command
(FWD/REV)
02-29
02-30
multi-function
output terminal
d=12
mechanical
brake
multi-function
input terminal
d=42
T2<02-35
T1<02-35
ꢀ Digital Input Response Time
Unit: 0.001
02-09
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.005
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.001~ 30.000 sec
This parameter is used for digital input terminal signal delay and confirmation. The delay time
is confirmation time to prevent some uncertain interferences that would result in error (except
for the counter input) in the input of the digital terminals (FWD, REV and MI1~8). Under this
condition, confirmation for this parameter could be improved effectively, but the response time
will be somewhat delayed.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02-10 ꢀ Digital Input Operation Direction
Control
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0 ~ 65535
This parameter is used to set the input signal level and it won’t be affected by the
SINK/SOURCE status.
Bit0 is for FWD terminal, bit1 is for REV terminal and bit2 to bit9 is for MI1 to MI8.
User can change terminal status by communicating.
For example, MI1 is set to 1 (multi-step speed command 1), MI2 is set to 2 (multi-step speed
command 2). Then the forward + 2nd step speed command=1001(binary)=9 (Decimal). Only
need to set Pr.02-10=9 by communication and it can forward with 2nd step speed. It doesn’t
need to wire any multi-function terminal.
bit9 bit8 bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
MI8 MI7 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1 REV FWD
02-11 Multi-function Output 1 RA, RB, RC (Relay1)
Factory Setting: 11
02-12 Multi-function Output 2 MRA, MRC (Relay2)
Factory Setting: 1
02-13 Multi-function Output 3 (MO1)
02-14 Multi-function Output 4 (MO2)
02-15 Multi-function Output 5 (MO3) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-16 Multi-function Output 6 (MO4) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-17 Multi-function Output 7 (MO5) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-18 Multi-function Output 8 (MO6) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-19 Multi-function Output 9 (MO7) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-20 Multi-function Output 10 (MO8) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-21 Multi-function Output 11 (MO9) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
02-22 Multi-function Output 12 (MO10) (need to use with EMVL-IODA01)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0-41
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
○
○
○
○
○
○
0: No function
1: Operation indication
○
○
4-42
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
Settings
2: Operation speed attained
VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
VFPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SVC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
3: Desired frequency attained 1 (Pr.02-25)
4: Desired frequency attained 2 (Pr.02-27)
5: Zero speed (frequency command)
6: Zero speed with stop (frequency command)
7: Over torque (OT1) (Pr.06-05~06-07)
8: Over torque (OT2) (Pr.06-08~06-10)
9: Drive ready
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
10: User-defined Low-voltage Detection (LV)
11: Malfunction indication
12: Mechanical brake release (Pr.02-29, Pr.02-30)
13: Overheat (Pr.06-14)
14: Brake chopper signal
15: Motor-controlled magnetic contactor output
16: Slip error (oSL)
17: Malfunction indication 1
○
18: Reserved
19: Brake chopper output error
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
20: Warning output
21: Over voltage warning
22: Over-current stall prevention warning
23: Over-voltage stall prevention warning
24: Operation mode indication (Pr.00-15≠0)
25: Forward command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
26: Reverse command
27: Output when current >= Pr.02-33
28: Output when current < Pr.02-33
29: Output when frequency >= Pr.02-34
30: Output when frequency < Pr.02-34
31-32: Reserved
33: Zero speed (actual output frequency)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
34: Zero speed with Stop (actual output frequency)
35: Fault output option 1 (Pr.06-22)
36: Fault output option 2 (Pr.06-23)
37: Fault output option 3 (Pr.06-24)
38: Fault output option 4 (Pr.06-25)
39: Reserved
○
○
○
○
40: Speed attained (including zero speed)
○
○
○
○
○
41: Reserved
Settings
Functions
No Function
Descriptions
0
Active when there is an output from the drive or RUN
command is ON.
1
2
AC Drive Operational
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output frequency
setting.
Operation speed attained
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Desired Frequency
Attained 1 (Pr.02-25)
3
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-25) is attained.
Desired Frequency
Attained 2 (Pr.02-27)
4
5
6
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.02-27) is attained.
Zero Speed (frequency Active when frequency command =0. (the drive should be at
command)
RUN mode)
Zero Speed with Stop
(frequency command)
Active when frequency command =0 or stop.
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-05 (over-
torque detection selection-OT1), Pr.06-06 (over-torque
detection level-OT1) and Pr.06-07 (over-torque detection
time-OT1).
Over Torque (OT1)
(Pr.06-05~06-07)
7
8
Active when detecting over-torque. Refer to Pr.06-08 (over-
torque detection selection-OT2), Pr.06-09 (over-torque
detection level-OT2) and Pr.06-10 (over-torque detection
time-OT2).
Over Torque (OT2)
(Pr.06-08~06-10)
9
Drive Ready
Active when the drive is ON and no abnormality detected.
User-defined Low-
voltage Detection
Active when the DC Bus voltage is too low. (refer to Pr.06-00
low voltage level)
10
11
Malfunction Indication
Active when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
Mechanical Brake
Release (Pr.02-29,
Pr.02-30)
When drive runs after Pr.02-29, it will be ON. This function
should be used with DC brake and it is recommended to use
contact ”b”(N.C).
12
13
14
Active when IGBT or heat sink overheats to prevent OH turn
off the drive. (refer to Pr.06-14)
Overheat (Pr.06-14)
The output will be activated when the drive needs help
braking the load. A smooth deceleration is achieved by using
this function. (refer to Pr.07-00)
Brake Chopper Signal
Motor-controlled
Magnetic Contactor
Output
15
16
Active when the setting is set to 15.
Active when the slip error is detected.
Slip Error (oSL)
17
18
19
Malfunction indication 1 Activate after 10ms when fault occurs (except Lv stop).
Reserved
Brake Chopper Output
Active when the brake chopper error is detected.
Error
4-44
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
20
Warning Output
Active when the warning is detected.
21
22
23
Over-voltage Warning
Active when the over-voltage is detected.
Active when the over-current stall prevention is detected.
Over-current Stall
Prevention Warning
Over-voltage Stall
prevention Warning
Active when the over-voltage stall prevention is detected.
Active when the operation command is controlled by external
Operation Mode
Indication
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
≠
terminal. (Pr.00-15 0)
Forward Command
Reverse Command
Active when the operation direction is forward.
Active when the operation direction is reverse.
Active when current is >= Pr.02-33.
Output when Current >=
Pr.02-33
Output when Current <
Pr.02-33
Active when current is < Pr.02-33.
Output when frequency
>= Pr.02-34
Active when frequency is >= Pr.02-34.
Active when frequency is < Pr.02-34.
Output when Frequency
< Pr.02-34
31-32 Reserved
Zero Speed (actual
Active when the actual output frequency is 0. (the drive should
be at RUN mode)
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
output frequency)
Zero Speed with Stop
(actual output frequency) drive should be at RUN mode)
Active when the actual output frequency is 0 or Stop. (the
Fault output option 1
Fault output option 2
Fault output option 3
Fault output option 4
Reserved
Active when Pr.06-22 is ON.
Active when Pr.06-23 is ON.
Active when Pr.06-24 is ON.
Active when Pr.06-25 is ON.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Functions
Descriptions
Speed Attained
(including zero speed)
40
Active when the output frequency reaches frequency setting.
41
Reserved
02-23 ꢀ Multi-output Direction
Unit:1
Factory setting: 0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0 ~ 65535
This parameter is bit setting. If the bit is 1, the multi-function output terminal will be act with
opposite direction. For example, if Pr.02-11 is set to 1 and forward bit is 0, Relay 1 will be ON
when the drive is running and OFF when the drive is stop.
The multi-function output terminals MO3~MO10 need to use with EMVL-IODA01.
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
MO10 MO9 MO8 MO7 MO6 MO5 MO4 MO3 MO2 MO1 MRA RA
02-24 ꢀSerial Start Signal Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
by FWD/REV
by Enable
This parameter is used to select serial start method of electromagnetic valve.
When setting to 0
When setting to 1
Enable
FWD
REV
FWD
REV
Enable
MC1
MC1
reverse
running input MI=40
reverse
running
Multifunction
forward
running
forward
running
Multifunction
input MI=40
Multifunction
output MO=15
Multifunction
output MO=15
MC1
MC1
Electromagnetic valve
Electromagnetic valve
4-46
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Controller
Signal output
Controller
Signal output
FWD/REV
Enable
FWD/REV
Enable
Driver
Multifunction
output/inpu
Driver
Multifuncti
output/input
on
t
FWD/REV
Enable
FWD/REV
Enable
Multifunction
output=15
Multifunction
output=15
02-31
Motor
Motor
Electromagnetic
valve
Electromagnetic
valve
02-31
no voltage output
02-25 ꢀDesired Frequency Attained 1
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
02-26 ꢀ The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 1
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
02-27 ꢀDesired Frequency Attained 2
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 60.00/50.00
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
02-28 ꢀ The Width of the Desired Frequency Attained 2
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 ~ 120.00Hz
Once output frequency reaches desired frequency and the corresponding multi-function output
terminal is set to 3 or 4 (Pr.02-11~Pr.02-22), this multi-function output terminal will be ON.
02-29 Brake Release Delay Time when Elevator Starts
Unit:0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.250
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
02-30 Brake Engage Delay Time when Elevator Stops
Unit:0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.250
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000~65.000 Sec
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When the AC motor drive runs after Pr.02-29 delay time, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be ON. This function should be used with
DC brake.
When the AC motor drive stops 12 after Pr.02-30 delay time, the corresponding multi-function
output terminal (12: mechanical brake release) will be OFF.
07- 03
DCbrake
time during
07-04
DCbrake
time during
start-up
stopping
Motor speed/
DCbrake
DCbrake
Output frequency
RUN
STOP
RUN/STOP
02-30 Brake engage
delay time when
elevator stops
02-29 Brake release delay time
when elevator starts
Multi-function output
(m ech a ni ca l br ak e r ele as e)
Pr.0 2- 11 to 02-22=1 2
bo un ce ti me o f me ch an i cal b ra ke
Mechanical brake release
brake
engage
brake
engage
Mechanicalbrake
02-31 ꢀ Turn On Delay of Magnetic Contact between Drive and Motor
02-32 ꢀ Turn Off Delay of Magnetic Contact between Drive and Motor
Unit:0.001
Unit:0.001
Factory setting:
0.200
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000~65.000 Sec
After running, it is used with setting 40 of multifunction input terminal and settings 15 of
multifunction output terminals. When multifunction output terminals is ON, the drive starts
output after Pr.02-31 delay time. When drive stops output, multifunction output terminals will
release after Pr.02-32 delay time.
4-48
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
5
6
7
8
9
2
4
MI1=40
Enable drive
function
Start forward
running/start
reverse running
MI2=1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
multi-step
speed1
MI3=2
multi-step
speed2
0
MI4=3
multi-step
speed3
01-25=S2
01=26=S3
01-13
decel. time
01-29
01-12
accel. time
Switch frequency
for S3/S4 changes
to S5
01-31
01-27=S4
Deceleration time
when operating
without RUN command
01-24=S1
frequency
output
01-30=S5
DC brake
07-04
07-03
DC brake time
during stopping
DC brake time during start-up
multi-function
output =15
Motor-controlled
magnetic
contactor output
02-31
Turn on delay of magnetic
contactor between drive and
02-32
Turn off delay of magnetic
contactor between drive and
motor
motor
3
multi-function
output=1
operation
indication
multi-function
output=12
mechanical
brake release
02-30
02-29 brake release delay time
when elevator starts
brake engage delay time
when elevator stops
11-00 bit 7=1
Zero speed
control
10-22
Operation time of zero speed
motor release
9
elevator starts running
start deceleration
the end of creep
5
6
7
8
electromagnetic valve is ON
brake release
2
3
4
start DC brake time during stopping
the end of DC brake time during stopping
the end of D C brake time
at start-up
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02-33 ꢀ Output Current Level Setting for External Terminals
Unit:1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0~100%
When output current is >= Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal (Pr.02-11 to
Pr.02-22 is set to 27).
When output current is < Pr.02-33, it will activate multi-function output terminal (Pr.02-11 to
Pr.02-22 is set to 28).
02-34 ꢀ Output Boundary for External Terminals
Unit:0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00~±120.00Hz
When output frequency is >=02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-11 to
Pr.02-22 is set to 29).
When output frequency is <02-34, it will activate the multi-function terminal (Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-
22 is set to 30).
02-35 ꢀ Detection Time of Mechanical Brake
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 ~ 10.00 sec
When mechanical brake function (setting 42 of Pr.02-01~02-08) is not enabled within this
setting time, it will display fault code 64 (MBF) mechanical brake error.
4-50
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 3 Analog Input/Output Parameters
03-00
ꢀAnalog Input 1 (AUI1)
Factory Setting: 1
03-01
03-02
ꢀAnalog Input 2 (ACI)
ꢀAnalog Input 3 (AUI2)
Factory Setting: 0
Factory Setting: 0
Control Mode
Settings
VF
○
○
VFPG
○
SVC
○
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
0: No function
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1: Frequency command (torque limit under TQR control mode)
2: Torque command (torque limit under speed mode)
3: Torque compensation command
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
4-5: Reserved
6: P.T.C. thermistor input value
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
7: Positive torque limit
8: Negative torque limit
9: Regenerative torque limit
10: Positive/negative torque limit
11: Preload Input
When it is frequency command or TQR speed limit, the corresponding value for 0~±
10V/4~20mA is 0 – max. output frequency(Pr.01-00)
When it is torque command or torque limit, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 –
max. output torque (Pr.07-14).
When it is torque compensation, the corresponding value for 0~±10V/4~20mA is 0 – rated
torque.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Positive torque
03-00~02=5
Positive torque limit
03-00~02=7
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=8
Positive/negative torque limit
Reverse
Forward
03-00~02=8
Positive/negative torque limit
03-00~02=7
Regenerative
torque limit
03-00~02=6
Negative torque limit
Negative Torque
07-19: Source of torque offset
03-00~02: Analog input selections (AUI1/ACI/AUI2)
03-03~05: Analog input bias (AUI1/ACI/AUI2)
03-06~08: AUI1/ACI/AUI2 bias mode
+
Analog input
03-00~02
Analog input gain
03-09~11
Preload
07-19=1
+/-
Bias mode
03-06~08
Bias
03-03~05
03-03 ꢀAnalog Input Bias 1 (AUI1)
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0.0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI1 voltage of the external analog input 0.
03-04 ꢀAnalog Input Bias 1 (ACI)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
4-52
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
It is used to set the corresponding ACI voltage of the external analog input 0.
03-05 ꢀAnalog Input Bias 1 (AUI2)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
-100.0~100.0%
It is used to set the corresponding AUI2 voltage of the external analog input 0.
The relation between external input voltage/current and setting frequency is equal to -10~+10V
(4-20mA) corresponds to 0-60Hz.
03-06 ꢀ Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI1)
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
03-07 ꢀ Positive/negative Bias Mode (ACI)
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
03-08 ꢀ Positive/negative Bias Mode (AUI2)
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Zero bias
Lower than bias=bias
2
3
4
Greater than bias=bias
The absolute value of the bias voltage while serving as the center
Serve bias as the center
In a noisy environment, it is advantageous to use negative bias to provide a noise margin. It is
recommended NOT to use less than 1V to set the operating frequency.
03-09 ꢀ Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI1)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
03-10 ꢀ Analog Input Gain 1 (ACI)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
03-11 ꢀ Analog Input Gain 1 (AUI2)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
-500.0~500.0%
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Parameters 03-03 to 03-11 are used when the source of frequency command is the analog
voltage/current signal.
03-12 ꢀ Analog Input Delay Time (AUI1)
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.01
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
03-13 ꢀ Analog Input Delay Time (ACI)
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.01
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
03-14 ꢀ Analog Input Delay Time (AUI2)
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.01
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 to 2.00 sec
Interferences commonly exist with analog signals, such as those entering AUI, ACI and AUI2.
These interferences constantly affect the stability of analog control and using the Input Noise
Filter will create a more stable system.
If Pr. 03-14 is large, the control will be stable, yet the response to the input will be slow. If Pr.
03-14 is small, the control may be unstable, yet the response to the input will fast.
03-15 ꢀ Loss of the ACI Signal
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Disable
Continue operation at the last frequency
2
3
Decelerate to stop
Stop immediately and display E.F.
This parameter determines the behavior when ACI (4-20mA) is lost.
03-16 Reserved
03-17 ꢀ Analog Output Selection 1
03-20 ꢀ Analog Output Selection 2
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0-20
4-54
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Control Mode
Settings
0: Output frequency (Hz)
VF
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
VFPG
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SVC
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1: Frequency command (Hz)
2: Motor speed (RPM)
3: Output current (rms)
4: Output voltage
5: DC Bus Voltage
6: Power factor
7: Power
8: Output torque
9: AUI1
10: ACI
11: AUI2
12: q-axis current
13: q-axis feedback value
14: d-axis current
15: d-axis feedback value
16: q-axis voltage
17: d-axis voltage
18: Torque command
19-20: Reserved
03-18 ꢀ Analog Output Gain 1
03-21 ꢀ Analog Output Gain 2
Control
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Unit: 0.1
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0 to 200.0%
This parameter is set the corresponding voltage of the analog output 0.
03-19 ꢀ Analog Output Value in REV Direction 1
03-22 ꢀ Analog Output Value in REV Direction 2
Control
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0
Absolute value in REV direction
Output 0V in REV direction
1
2
Enable output voltage in REV direction
10V
10V
10V
frequency
03-19=2
frequency
frequency
03-19=1
03-19=0
0V
0V
0V
Selection for the analog output direction
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 4 Multi-Step Speed Parameters
04-00 ꢀZero Step Speed Frequency
04-01 ꢀ1st Step Speed Frequency
04-02 ꢀ2nd Step Speed Frequency
04-03 ꢀ3rd Step Speed Frequency
04-04 ꢀ4th Step Speed Frequency
04-05 ꢀ5th Step Speed Frequency
04-06 ꢀ6th Step Speed Frequency
04-07 ꢀ7th Step Speed Frequency
04-08 ꢀ8th Step Speed Frequency
04-09 ꢀ9th Step Speed Frequency
04-10 ꢀ10th Step Speed Frequency
04-11 ꢀ11th Step Speed Frequency
04-12 ꢀ12th Step Speed Frequency
04-13 ꢀ13th Step Speed Frequency
04-14 ꢀ14th Step Speed Frequency
04-15 ꢀ15th Step Speed Frequency
Control
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00 to 120.00 Hz
The Multi-Function Input Terminals (refer to Pr.02-01 to 02-08) are used to select one of the
AC motor drive Multi-step speeds. The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.04-00 to
04-15 as shown above.
4-56
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 5 IM Motor Parameters
05-00 Motor Auto Tuning
Control
VF
mode
Factory setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
No function
Rolling test (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current)
Static Test
Starting auto tuning by pressing RUN key and it will write the measure value into Pr.05-05 to
Pr.05-09 (Rs, Rr, Lm, Lx, no-load current).
The steps to AUTO-Tuning are: (when setting to 1)
1.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is
correct.
2.
Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not
connected to any belt or gear motor. It is recommended to set to 2 if the motor can’t
separate from the load.
3.
4.
Fill in Pr.01-02, Pr.01-01, Pr.05-01, Pr.05-02, Pr.05-03 and Pr.05-04 with correct values.
Refer to motor capacity to set accel./decel. time.
When Pr.05-00 is set to 1, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after
receiving a “RUN” command. (NOTE: the motor will run!)
5.
6.
After executing, please check if all values are filled in Pr.05-05 to Pr.05-09.
Equivalent circuit
Rs
I
Lx
Pr.05-09
Pr.05-06
Rr
Lm
VS
Pr.05-07
Pr.05-08
Equivalent circuit for VFD-VL series
If Pr.05-00 is set to 2, it needs to input Pr.05-05.
NOTE
1.
2.
In torque/vector control mode, it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
It is not recommended to use torque/vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the
rated power of the AC motor drive.
3.
The no-load current is usually 20~50% X rated current.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.
The rated speed can’t be larger or equal to 120f/p. (f: output frequency Pr.01-01, p: Number of
Motor Poles Pr.05-04)
05-01 Full-load Current of Motor
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
40 to 120%
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: if the rated current for 7.5hp (5.5kW) models is 25A and the factory setting is 22.5A.
In this way, the current range will be from 10A (25*40%) to 30A (25*120%).
05-02 Rated Power of Motor
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
0.00 to 655.35 kW
Factory Setting: #.##
It is used to set rated power of the motor. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
05-03 Rated Speed of Motor (rpm)
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 1710
Control
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
mode
Settings
0 to 65535 rpm
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated
on the motor nameplate.
05-04 Number of Motor Poles
Control
mode
Factory setting: 4
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
2 to 48
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
05-05 No-load Current of Motor
Unit: Amp
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
0 to 100%
The factory setting is 40% X rated current.
4-58
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05-06 Rs of Motor
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.000
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Rr of Motor
05-07
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.000
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
0.000~65.535Ω
05-08 Lm of Motor
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
05-09 Lx of Motor
Control
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0.0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
mode
Settings
0.0~6553.5mH
05-10 ꢀ Torque Compensation Time Constant
Unit: 0.001
Control
SVC
mode
Factory setting: 0.020
Settings
0.001 to 10.000 sec
05-11 ꢀ Slip Compensation Time Constant
Unit: 0.001
Control
SVC
mode
Factory setting: 0.100
Settings
0.001 to 10.000 sec
Setting Pr.05-10 and Pr.05-11 change the response time for the compensation.
When Pr.05-10 and Pr.05-11 are set to 10 seconds, its response time for the compensation
will be the longest. But if the settings are too short, unstable system may occur.
05-12 ꢀ Torque Compensation Gain
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 0
Control
VF
VFPG
mode
Settings
0 to10
This parameter may be set so that the AC motor drive will increase its voltage output to obtain
a higher torque.
05-13 ꢀ Slip Compensation Gain
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.00
SVC
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0.00 to10.00
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When the asynchronous motor is driven by the drive, the load and slip will be increased. This
parameter can be used to correct frequency and lower the slip to make the motor can run near
the synchronous speed under rated current. When the output current is larger than the motor
no-load current, the drive will compensate the frequency by Pr.05-13 setting. If the actual
speed is slower than expectation, please increase the setting and vice versa.
It is only valid in SVC mode.
05-14 ꢀ Slip Deviation Level
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0 to 1000% (0: disable)
05-15 ꢀ Detection time of Slip Deviation
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 1.0
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.0 to 10.0 sec
05-16 ꢀOver Slip Treatment
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operation
Warn and ramp to stop
Warn and coast to stop
Pr.05-14 to Pr.05-16 are used to set allowable slip level/time and over slip treatment when the
drive is running.
05-17 ꢀ Hunting Gain
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2000
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0 to 10000 (0: disable)
The motor will have current wave motion in some specific area. It can improve this situation by
setting this parameter. (When it is high frequency or run with PG, Pr.05-17 can be set to 0.
when the current wave motion happens in the low frequency, please increase Pr.05-17.)
05-18
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
00 to1439
4-60
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05-19
Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)
Unit: 1
Factory setting: 00
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
00 to 65535
Pr. 05-18 and Pr.05-19 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 00 and time which is less than 60 seconds will not be recorded.
05-20 ꢀ Core Loss Compensation
Unit: 1
Control
SVC
mode
Factory setting: 10
Settings
0 to 250%
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 6 Protection Parameters
06-00 Low Voltage Level
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings 230V series 160.0~220.0Vdc
460V series 320.0~440.0Vdc
Factory Setting: 180.0
Factory Setting: 360.0
It is used to set the Lv level.
input voltage
30V(60V)
Pr. 06-00
LV
06-01 ꢀ Phase-loss Protection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operation
Warn and ramp to stop
Warn and coast to stop
It is used to set the phase-loss treatment. The phase-loss will effect driver’s control
characteristic and life.
ꢀOver-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
06-02
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
00~250% (00: disable)
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06-02 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this
function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant
until the current drops below the maximum value.
4-62
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06-02
Over-Current
Detection
Level
current
Output
Frequency
Over-Current Stall
prevention during
Acceleration,
frequency held
time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
06-03
Unit: 1
ꢀOver-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Control
mode
Factory setting: 00
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
00 to 250% (00: disable)
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06-03 when the drive is operating, the
drive will decrease its output frequency by Pr.06-04 setting to prevent the motor stall. If the
output current is lower than the setting specified in Pr.06-03, the drive will accelerate (by
Pr.06-04) again to catch up with the set frequency command value.
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
Over-Current
frequency decrease
Detection Level
Output Current
06-03
Output
Frequency
Time
over-current stall prevention during operation
06-04
ꢀAccel./Decel. Time Selection of Stall Prevention at constant speed
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0
by current accel/decel time
1
2
3
4
5
by the 1st accel/decel time
by the 2nd accel/decel time
by the 3rd accel/decel time
by the 4th accel/decel time
by auto accel/decel time
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
It is used to set the accel./decel. time selection when stall prevention occurs at constant speed.
06-05 ꢀOver-torque Detection Selection (OT1)
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Over-Torque detection disabled.
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2
3
4
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after
detection
Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection
06-06 ꢀOver-torque Detection Level (OT1)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 150
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
10 to 250%
06-07 ꢀOver-torque Detection Time (OT1)
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0.1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
06-08 ꢀOver-torque Detection Selection (OT2)
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Over-Torque detection disabled.
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, continue to
operate after detection
2
3
4
Over-torque detection during constant speed operation, stop
operation after detection
Over-torque detection during operation, continue to operate after
detection
Over-torque detection during operation, stop operation after
detection
06-09 ꢀOver-torque Detection Level (OT2)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 150
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
10 to 250%
4-64
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06-10 ꢀOver-torque Detection Time (OT2)
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 0.1
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
Pr.06-05 and Pr.06-08 determine the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque is
detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level
(Pr.06-06) and also exceeds the Pr.06-07 Over-Torque Detection Time, the fault code
“OT1/OT2” is displayed. If a Multi-Functional Output Terminal is to over-torque detection, the
output is on. Please refer to Pr.02-11~02-22 for details.
current
5%
Pr.06-06,
Pr.06-09
Pr.06-07, 06-10
06-11 ꢀ Current Limit
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 150
FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
0 to 250%
It is used to set the current limit.
06-12 Electronic Thermal Relay Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 2
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
Inverter motor
Standard motor
Disabled
1
2
It is used to prevent self-cooled motor overheats under low speed. User can use electrical
thermal relay to limit driver’s output power.
06-13 ꢀElectronic Thermal Characteristic
Unit: 0.1
Factory setting: 60.0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
30.0 to 600.0 sec
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The parameter is set by the output frequency, current and operation time of the drive for
activating the I2t electronic thermal protection function. The function will be activated for the
150% * setting current for the setting of Pr.06-13.
Operation
time(min)
5
4
3
60Hz
2
1
Load
factor (%)
0
50 100 150
200
06-14 ꢀ Heat Sink Over-heat (OH) Warning
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 85.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 110.0 oC
06-15 ꢀ Stall Prevention Limit Level
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 50
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0 to 100% (refer to Pr.06-02, Pr.06-03)
When the operating frequency is larger than Pr.01-01, Pr06-02=150%, Pr. 06-03=100% and Pr.
06-15=80%:
Stall Prevention Level during acceleration = 06-02x06-15=150x80%=120%.
Stall Prevention Level at constant speed= 06-03x06-15=100x80%=80%.
Stall Prevention Level
01-01
x06-02
06-02
output frequency
06-15
frequency
01-01
4-66
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06-16 Present Fault Record
06-17 Second Most Recent Fault Record
06-18 Third Most Recent Fault Record
06-19 Fourth Recent Fault Record
06-20 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
06-21 Sixth Most Recent Fault Record
Control
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Readings
0
No fault
1
Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
Ground fault (GFF)
2
3
4
5
IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6
Over-current at stop (ocS)
Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
Phase loss (PHL)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
Fan error signal output
Over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
Motor over-load (EoL1)
Reserved
Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
Reserved
Over-torque 1 (ot1)
Over-torque 1 (ot2)
Reserved
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Reserved
Memory write-in error (cF1)
Memory read-out error (cF2)
Isum current detection error (cd0)
U-phase current detection error (cd1)
V-phase current detection error (cd2)
W-phase current detection error (cd3)
Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
Ground current detection error (Hd3)
Auto tuning error (AuE)
PID feedback loss (AFE)
PG feedback error (PGF1)
PG feedback loss (PGF2)
PG feedback stall (PGF3)
PG slip error (PGF4)
PG ref input error (PGr1)
PG ref loss (PGr2)
Analog current input error (ACE)
External fault input (EF)
Emergency stop (EF1)
Reserved
Password error (PcodE)
Reserved
Communication error (cE1)
Communication error (cE2)
Communication error (cE3)
57
58
Communication error (cE4)
Communication Time-out (cE10)
4-68
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
59
60
PU time-out (cP10)
Brake chopper error (bF)
61-62 Reserved
63
64
65
Safety loop error (Sry)
Mechanical brake error (MBF)
PGF5 hardware error
It will record when the fault occurs and force stopping. For the Lv, it will record when it is
operation, or it will warn without record.
06-30 ꢀ Setting Method of Fault Output
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
By settings of Pr.06-22~06-25
By the binary setting
1
It is used with the settings 35~38 of Pr.02-11~02-22 (Multi-function Output). The fault output
selection 1~4 corresponds to Bit 0~3.
This parameter provides two setting methods for the fault output: setting 0: it is set by the
settings of Pr.06-22~Pr.06-25; setting 1: it is set by the binary setting and please refer to the
following example for details.
Example:
Assume that
Pr.02-15 (Multi-function Output 5 (MO3)) is set to 35 Fault output option 1 (Pr.06-22).
Pr.02-17 (Multi-function Output 7 (MO5)) is set to 36 Fault output option 2 (Pr.06-23).
Pr.02-19 (Multi-function Output 9 (MO7)) is set to 37 Fault output option 3 (Pr.06-24).
Pr.02-21 (Multi-function Output 11 (MO9)) is set to 38 Fault output option 4 (Pr.06-25).
Assume that external faults output with the following signal: MO3=1, MO5=1, MO7=0 and
MO9=1. The corresponding Bit 3~0 is 1011.
Bit 3
-
Bit 2
-
Bit 1
-
Bit 0
-
Fault code
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration (ocA)
2: Over-current during deceleration (ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed (ocn)
4: Ground fault (GFF)
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
7: Over-voltage during acceleration (ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration (ovd)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Fault code
9: Over-voltage during constant speed (ovn)
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration (LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration (Lvd)
13: Low-voltage during constant speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
15: Phase loss (PHL)
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for 40HP above)
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error (cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error (cd2)
35: W-phase current detection error (cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error (Hd0)
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
39: Ground current detection error (Hd3)
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
1
0
1
0
48: Analog current input error (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
52: Password error (PcodE)
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
60: Brake chopper error (bF)
63: Safety loop error (Sry)
64: Mechanical brake error (MBF)
65: PGF5 hardware error
4-70
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06-22 ꢀ Fault Output Option 1
06-23 ꢀ Fault Output Option 2
06-24 ꢀ Fault Output Option 3
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
06-25 ꢀ Fault Output Option 4
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 65535 sec (refer to bit table for fault code)
These parameters can be used with multi-function output (set Pr.02-11 to Pr.02-22 to 35-38)
for the specific requirement. When the fault occurs, the corresponding terminals will be
activated (It needs to convert binary value to decimal value to fill in Pr.06-22 to Pr.06-25).
Bit0
Bit1 Bit2
Bit3
SYS
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt. OL
0: No fault
1: Over-current during acceleration
(ocA)
●
●
●
2: Over-current during deceleration
(ocd)
3: Over-current during constant speed
(ocn)
●
4: Ground fault (GFF)
●
●
●
5: IGBT short-circuit (occ)
6: Over-curent at stop (ocS)
7: Over-voltage during acceleration
(ovA)
8: Over-voltage during deceleration
(ovd)
●
●
9: Over-voltage during constant speed
(ovn)
●
●
10: Over-voltage at stop (ovS)
11: Low-voltage during acceleration
(LvA)
12: Low-voltage during deceleration
(Lvd)
●
●
●
13: Low-voltage during constant
speed (Lvn)
14: Low-voltage at stop (LvS)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit0
Bit1 Bit2
Bit3
SYS
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
●
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt. OL
15: Phase loss (PHL)
●
●
16: IGBT heat sink over-heat (oH1)
17: Heat sink over-heat (oH2)(for
40HP above)
●
●
18: TH1 open loop error (tH1o)
19: TH2 open loop error (tH2o)
20: Fan error signal output
21: over-load (oL) (150% 1Min)
22: Motor 1 over-load (EoL1)
23: Reserved
●
●
●
●
24: Motor PTC overheat (oH3)
25: Reserved
●
●
26: over-torque 1 (ot1)
27: over-torque 1 (ot2)
28: Reserved
29: Reserved
●
●
●
●
30: Memory write-in error (cF1)
31: Memory read-out error (cF2)
32: Isum current detection error (cd0)
33: U-phase current detection error
(cd1)
34: V-phase current detection error
(cd2)
●
●
●
35: W-phase current detection error
(cd3)
36: Clamp current detection error
(Hd0)
●
●
37: Over-current detection error (Hd1)
38: Over-voltage detection error (Hd2)
4-72
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit0
Bit1 Bit2
Bit3
SYS
●
Bit4
FBK
Bit5
EXI
Bit6
CE
Fault code
current Volt. OL
39: Ground current detection error
(Hd3)
●
40: Auto tuning error (AuE)
41: PID feedback loss (AFE)
42: PG feedback error (PGF1)
43: PG feedback loss (PGF2)
44: PG feedback stall (PGF3)
45: PG slip error (PGF4)
●
●
●
●
●
●
46: PG ref input error (PGr1)
●
●
●
●
47: PG ref loss (PGr2)
48: Analog current input error (ACE)
49: External fault input (EF)
50: Emergency stop (EF1)
51: Reserved
●
52: Password error (PcodE)
53: Reserved
●
●
●
●
●
●
54: Communication error (cE1)
55: Communication error (cE2)
56: Communication error (cE3)
57: Communication error (cE4)
58: Communication Time-out (cE10)
59: PU time-out (cP10)
●
●
60: Brake chopper error (bF)
61-62: Reserved
63: Safety loop error (Sry)
64: Mechanical brake error (MBF)
65: PGF5 hardware error
●
●
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06-26 ꢀ PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) Detection Selection
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
Warn and keep operating
Warn and ramp to stop
1
It is used to set the treatment after detecting PTC.
06-27 ꢀPTC Level
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory setting: 50.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
It is used to set the PTC level, and the corresponding value for 100% is max. analog input
value.
06-28 ꢀ Filter Time for PTC Detection
Unit: 0.01
Factory setting: 0.20
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.00 to 10.00 sec
06-29 EPS Voltage
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
48.0~375.0Vdc
96.0~750.0Vdc
Factory setting: 48.0
Factory setting: 96.0
It is used with the setting 43 (EPS function) of Pr.02-01~02-08 (Multi-Function Input
Command).
4-74
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 7 Special Parameters
07-00 ꢀ Brake Chopper Level
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings 230V series 350.0~450.0Vdc
460V series 700.0~900.0Vdc
Factory Setting: 380.0
Factory Setting: 760.0
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated.
07-01 Brake ED Value Setting
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 100% (0: disable)
07-02 ꢀ DC Brake Current Level
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC
Settings
0 to 100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00-01) is regarded as 100%.
It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper
holding torque has been attained.
When it is in FOCPG/TQCPG/FOCPM mode, it can enable DC brake function by setting to any
value.
07-03 ꢀ DC Brake Time during Start-up
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command.
07-04 ꢀ DC Brake Time during Stopping
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
0.0 to 60.0 sec
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-05 ꢀ Start-Point for DC Brake
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG
Settings
0.00 to 120.00Hz
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration. When
the setting is less than start frequency (Pr.01-09), start-point for DC brake will begin from the
min. frequency.
Output frequency
DC Brake Time
07-05
during Stopping
01-09
Start
frequency
Start-point for
DC brake
time during
stopping
07-03
07-04
OFF
Run/Stop
Time
ON
DC Brake Time
07-06 DC Brake Proportional Gain
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 50
Control
VF
VFPG
SVC
mode
Settings
1 to 500Hz
It is used to set the output voltage gain when DC brake.
07-07 ꢀ Dwell Time at Accel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 sec
07-08 ꢀ Dwell Frequency at Accel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 to 120.00 Hz
07-09 ꢀ Dwell Time at Decel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 sec
07-10 ꢀ Dwell Frequency at Decel.
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 to 120.00 Hz
In the heavy load situation, Dwell can make stable output frequency temporarily.
4-76
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.07-07 to Pr.07-10 are for heavy load to prevent OV or OC occurs.
Frequency
07-10
Dwell
Frequency
at Decel.
07-08
Dwell
Frequency
07-09
Dwell Time
at Decel.
07-07
Dwell Time
at Accel.
at Accel.
Time
Dwell at accel./decel.
07-11 ꢀ Fan Control
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
Fan always ON
1
2
3
4
1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
AC motor drive runs and fan ON, AC motor drive stops and fan OFF
Fan ON to run when preliminary heat sink temperature attained
Fan always OFF
This parameter is used for the fan control.
When setting to 3, fan will start to run until temperature is less than 40°C if temperature
exceeds 40°C.
07-12 ꢀ Torque Command
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Control
TQCPG
mode
Settings
-100.0 to 100.0% (Pr. 07-14 setting=100%)
This parameter is torque command. When Pr.07-14 is 250% and Pr.07-12 is 100%, the actual
torque command = 250X100% X motor rated torque.
07-13 ꢀ Torque Command Source
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2
TQCPG
Settings
0
1
2
Digital keypad
RS485 serial communication (RJ-11)
Analog signal (Pr.03-00)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This parameter is torque command source and the torque command is in Pr.07-12.
07-14 ꢀ Maximum Torque Command
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 500%
This parameter is for the max. torque command (motor rated torque is 100%).
07-15 ꢀ Filter Time of Torque Command
Unit: 0.001
Factory Setting: 0.000
Control
TQCPG
mode
Settings
0.000 to 1.000 sec
When the setting is too long, the control will be stable but the control response will be delay.
When the setting is too short, the response will be quickly but the control maybe unstable.
User can adjust the setting by the control and response situation.
07-16 Speed Limit Selection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
TQCPG
Settings
0
1
By Pr.07-17 and Pr.07-18
Frequency command source (Pr.00-14)
torque
torque
torque
frequency
frequency
frequency
07-17
07-18
07-17
07-18
07-16=1
When it is forward running,
running direction is limited
by Pr.00-14
opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.07-18.
00-14
00-14
07-16=1
Pr.07-16=0
Running/opposite running
direction are
limited by Pr.07-17
and Pr.07-18.
When it is reverse running,
running direction is limited
by Pr.07-17
opposite running direction
is limited by Pr.00-14.
07-17 ꢀ Torque Mode+Speed Limit
07-18 ꢀ Torque Mode-Speed Limit
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
TQCPG
mode
Factory Setting: 10
Settings
0 to 120%
These parameters are used in the torque mode to limit the running direction and opposite
direction. (Pr.01-00 max. output frequency=100%)
4-78
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-19 ꢀ Source of Torque Offset
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
3
Disable
Analog input (Pr.03-00)
Torque offset setting (Pr.07-20)
Control by external terminal (by Pr.07-21 to Pr.07-23)
This parameter is the source of torque offset.
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-21, Pr.07-22 and Pr.07-23
by the multi-function input terminals setting (19, 20 or 21).
02-01~02-08 is set to 19 02-01~02-08 is set to 20 02-01~02-08 is set to 21
Torque offset
None
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
07-25
OFF
ON
07-24
ON
07-25+07-24
07-23
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
07-23+07-25
07-23+07-24
07-23+07-24+07-25
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
07-20 ꢀ Torque Offset Setting
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
This parameter is torque offset. The motor rated torque is 100%.
07-21 ꢀ High Torque Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 30.0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
07-22 ꢀ Middle Torque Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 20.0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-23 ꢀ Low Torque Offset
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 10.0
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
When it is set to 3, the source of torque offset will decide to Pr.07-21, Pr.07-22 and Pr.07-23
by the multi-function input terminals setting (19, 20 or 21). The motor rated torque is 100%.
07-24 ꢀ Forward Motor Torque Limit
07-25 ꢀ Forward Regenerative Torque Limit
07-26 ꢀ Reverse Motor Torque Limit
07-27 ꢀ Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 200
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 500%
The motor rated torque is 100%. The settings for Pr.07-24 to Pr.07-27 will compare with Pr.03-
00=5, 6, 7, 8. The minimum of the comparison result will be torque limit.
Positive
torque
Reverse motor mode
06-11 current limit
Forward motor mode
06-11 current limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~02
5: positive torque limit
8: positive/negative torque limit
7: regenerative torque limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~02
5: positive torque limit
The level of torque limit will be
the min. value of following three values
1. torque limit of Pr.07-24 to Pr.07-26
2. Torque limit of external analog terminals
3. Pr.06-11 current limit
8: positive/negative torque limit
Pr.07-27
Reverse regenerative
torque limit
Pr.07-24
Forward motor
torque limit
speed
speed
Quadrant I
Quadrant II
Quadrant III Quadrant IV
Pr.07-25
Forward regenerative
torque limit
Pr.07-26
Reverse motor
torque limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~03-02
6: negative torque limit
External analog terminals
Pr.03-00~03-02
6: negative torque limit
8: positive/negative torque limit
8: positive/negative torque limit
06-11 current limit
Reverse motor mode
06-11 current limit
Forward motor mode
Negative
torque
4-80
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07-28 ꢀ Emergency Stop (EF) & Forced Stop Selection
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
Coast to stop
By deceleration Time 1
By deceleration Time 2
By deceleration Time 3
By deceleration Time 4
By Pr.01-31
When the multi-function input terminal is set to 10 or 14 and it is ON, the AC motor drive will be
operated by Pr.07-28.
07-29 ꢀ Time for Decreasing Torque at Stop
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.000
FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000 to 1.000 sec
It is used to set the time for decreasing torque to 0%.
RUN/STOP
i
100%
x
x
(07-29)=t
00-01 300%
i
0%
t
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 8 PM Motor Parameters
08-00 Motor Auto Tuning
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory setting: 0
Settings
0
1
No function
Only for the unloaded motor, auto measure the angle between magnetic
field and PG origin (08-09)
2
3
For PM motor parameters
Auto measure the angle between magnetic field and PG origin (08-09)
For setting 1: It can auto measure the angle between magnetic field and PG origin. Please
notice the following items when measuring:
1.
Please unload before tuning.
2.
If brake is controlled by drive, the drive will act by the normal operation to finish tuning
after wiring and setting brake control parameters.
3.
If brake is controlled by the host controller, it needs to make sure that brake is in release
state before tuning.
For setting 2: Starting auto tuning by pressing RUN key and it will write the measure value into
Pr.08-05 to Pr.08-07 (Rs, Lq).
The steps to AUTO-Tuning are: (Dynamic measure)
1.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is
correct.
2.
3.
Motor: Fill in Pr.08-01, Pr.08-02, Pr.08-03 and Pr.08-04 with correct values. Refer to
motor capacity to set accel./decel. time.
When Pr.08-00 is set to 2, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after
receiving a “RUN” command. (NOTE: the motor will run! The shaft needs to be locked
with external force.)
4.
After executing, please check if all values are filled in Pr.08-05 and Pr.08-07.
For setting 3: It can auto measure the angle between magnetic field and PG origin. Please
notice the following items when measuring:
1.
It can be loaded motor or unloaded motor before tuning.
If brake is controlled by drive, the drive will act by the normal operation to finish tuning
after wiring and setting brake control parameters.
2.
3.
If brake is controlled by the host controller, it needs to make sure that brake is in release
state before tuning.
4-82
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
NOTE
„ The rated speed can’t be larger or equal to 120f/p.
„ Please notice that if the electromagnetic valve and brake is not controlled by the AC
motor drive, please release it by manual.
„ It is recommended to set Pr.08-00 to 1 (unloaded motor) for the accurate calculation. If it
needs to execute this function with loaded motor, please balance the carriage before
execution.
„ if it doesn’t allow balancing the carriage in the measured environment, it can set Pr.08-
00=3 for executing this function. It can execute this function with loaded motor by setting
Pr.08-00=3. It will have a difference of 15~30o by the different encoder type.
„ It will display the warning message “Auto tuning” on the digital keypad during measuring
until the measure is finished. Then, the result will be saved into Pr.08-09.
„ It will display “Auto Tuning Err” on the keypad when stopping by the fault of the AC motor
drive or human factor to show the failed detection. At this moment, please check the
connections of the wirings of the AC motor drives. If it displays “PG Fbk Error” on the
digital keypad, please change the setting of Pr.10-02 (if it is set to 1, please change it to
2). If it displays “PG Fbk Loss” on the digital keypad, please check the feedback of Z-
phase pulse.
08-01 Full-load Current of Motor
Control
mode
Factory setting: #.##
FOCPM
Settings
40 to 120%
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. The factory setting is 90% X rated current.
Example: if the rated current for 7.5hp (5.5kW) models is 25A and the factory setting is 22.5A.
In this way, the current range will be from 10A (25*40%) to 30A (25*120%).
08-02 ꢀRated Power of Motor
Unit: 0.01
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory setting: #.##
Settings
0.00 to 655.35 kW
It is used to set rated power of the motor. The factory setting is the power of the drive.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
08-03 ꢀ Rated Speed of Motor (rpm)
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory setting: 1710
Settings
0 to 65535
It is used to set the rated speed of the motor and need to set according to the value indicated
on the motor nameplate.
08-04 Number of Motor Poles
Control
mode
Factory setting: 4
FOCPM
Settings
2 to 96
It is used to set the number of motor poles (must be an even number).
08-05 Rs of Motor
Unit: 0.001
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory setting: 0.000
Settings
0.000~65.535Ω
08-06 Ld of Motor
Unit: 0.1
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory setting: 0.0
08-07 Lq of Motor
Unit: 0.1
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory setting: 0.0
Settings
0.0~6553.5mH
08-08 Reserved
Unit: 0.1
08-09
Angle between Magnetic Field and PG Origin
Control
mode
Factory setting: 360.0
FOCPM
Settings
0.0~360.0°
This function is used to measure the angle between magnetic field and PG origin.
08-10
Magnetic Field Re-orientation
Control
mode
Factory setting: 0
FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
4-84
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This function is used for searching magnetic field position and only for permanent magnet
motor.
When it doesn’t have origin-adjustment for encoder (Pr.08-09 is 360.0), it can only ensure that
the motor operation efficiency can be up to 86% of the best efficiency. In this situation, when
the operation efficiency needs to be improved, user can re-power on or set Pr.08-10 to 1 to get
the magnetic field orientation.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 9: Communication Parameters
When the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, a converter, VFD-USB01
or IFD8500, should be connected between the AC motor drive and PC.
Serial interface
1: +EV
2: GND
3: SG-
4: SG+
5: NC
1
6
RS-485
6: NC
09-00 ꢀCommunication Address
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
1 to 254
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication
address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different and unique.
09-01 ꢀ Transmission Speed
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 9.6
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
4.8 to 115.2kbps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.
09-02 ꢀ Transmission Fault Treatment
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 3
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
3
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Reserved
No action and no display
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
09-03 ꢀ Time-out Detection
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 ~ 100.0 sec (0.0: disable)
It is used to set the communication time-out time.
4-86
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09-04 ꢀ Communication Protocol
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 13
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <8,O,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1. Control by PC or PLC
A VFD-VL can be set up to communicate on Modbus networks using one of the following modes:
ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal Unit).
Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in Pr.09-04.
Code Description:
ASCII mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data:
64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
‘7’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Character
‘8’
‘9’
‘A’
‘B’
‘C’
‘D’
‘E’
‘F’
ASCII code
38H
39H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
RTU mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64
Hex.
2. Data Format
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
( 7.N.2)
Start
bit
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
5
0
1
2
3
4
6
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.E.1)
Start
bit
Even
parity
Stop
bit
0
3
4
5
1
2
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.O.1)
Start
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
11-bit character frame (For RTU):
( 8.N.2 )
Start
bit
Stop Stop
0
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
bit
bit
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.E.1 )
Even
parity
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
1
1
2
3
4
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.O.1 )
Odd
parity
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
2
3
4
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX
Start character ‘:’ (3AH)
Communication address:
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
Contents of data:
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
DATA (n-1)
to
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=16, maximum of 32 ASCII codes
DATA 0
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
END Lo
4-88
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
RTU mode:
START
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Address
Function
Communication address: 8-bit address
Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
to
DATA 0
Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=16
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
3.2 Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal to 0,
means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any message to the
master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):
ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H
RTU mode: Address=10H
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
08H: loop detection
10H: write multiple registers
The available function codes and examples for VFD-VL are described as follows:
(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Response message:
Command message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
Address
Address
Function
Function
‘3’
‘2’
‘1’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
(Count by byte)
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
Starting data
address
Content of starting
address
Number of data
(count by word)
2102H
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Response message:
Command message:
‘0’
‘2’
‘D’
‘7’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
Content of address
2103H
LRC Check
END
‘0’
CR
LF
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Response message:
Address
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Content of address
2102H
Content of address
2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
01H
03H
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
01H
03H
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
04H
17H
70H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH
(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
Address
Address
Function
Function
Data address
Data address
Data content
Data content
LRC Check
END
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Response message:
Command message:
Address
01H
06H
01H
00H
17H
70H
Address
Function
01H
06H
01H
00H
17H
70H
Function
Data address
Data content
Data address
Data content
4-90
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
86H
22H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
86H
22H
(3) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.04-00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.04-01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘E’
‘8’
CR
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data
address
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
LRC Check
END
‘3’
LF
The first data
content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
The second data
content
‘F’
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
END
‘A’
CR
LF
RTU mode:
Command message:
Response message:
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
The first data
content
The second data
content
CRC Check Low
CRC Check High
01H
Address
Function
Starting data address
01H
10H
05H
00H
00H’
02H
04
10H
05H
00H
00H
02H
41H
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC Check Low
13H
88H
0FH
A0H
‘9’
CRC Check High
04H
‘A’
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
3.4 Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values of
the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation of the
2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘F’
‘6’
CR
LF
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data address
Number of data
LRC Check 1
LRC Check 0
END 1
END 0
01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
RTU mode:
Address
Function
01H
03H
Starting data address
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of the
16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB zero
filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the right
with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H, then repeat
step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete
8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing this
until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC value.
When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC value
must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
4-92
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
3.5 Address list
The contents of available addresses are shown as below:
Content
Address
Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number,
for example, the address of Pr 4-01 is 0401H. Referencing to
chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading
parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can
be read at one time.
AC drive
Parameters
GGnn
H
0: No function
Command
Write only
1: Stop
2: Run
2000H
Bit 0-3
3: Jog + Run
00B: No function
01B: FWD
Bit 4-5
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: 1st accel/decel
01B: 2nd accel/decel
10B: 3rd accel/decel
Bit 6-7
11B: 4th accel/decel
Bit 8-11
Represented 16 step speeds.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Content
Address
Function
Bit 12
1: disable bit 06-11
Bit 13~14 00B: No function
01B: operated by digital keypad
02B: operated by Pr.00-15 setting
03B: change operation source
Reserved
Bit 15
2001H Frequency command
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
1: EF (external fault) on
1: Reset
1: B.B. ON
Reserved
2002H
Bit 3-15
2100H Fault code: refer to Pr.06-16 to Pr.06-21
Bit 0-Bit 1 00: Stop
01: deceleration
10: Ready for operation
11: operation
Bit 2
1:JOG command
00: FWD command, FWD output
01: FWD command, REV output
10: REV command, FWD output
11: Reserved
Status
monitor Read
only
Bit 3-Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
2119H
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
interface
1: Master frequency controlled by analog/external
terminals signal
Bit 8
Bit 9
1: Operation command controlled by
communication interface
1: Parameters have been locked
1: enable to copy parameter from keypad
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13-15 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (F)
2103H Output frequency (H)
2104H Output current (AXXX.X)
2105H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
2106H Output voltage (EXXX.X)
2107H Current step number of Multi-Step Speed Operation
2116H Multi-function display (Pr.00-04)
2201H Pr.00-05 user-defined setting
2203H AUI1 analog input (XXX.XX %)
2204H ACI analog input (XXX.XX %)
2205H AUI2 analog input (XXX.XX %)
2206H Display temperature of IGBT (oC)
2207H Display temperature of heatsink (oC) (only for model 40HP
and above)
2208H Digital input state
2209H Digital output state
4-94
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
3.6 Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command messages
from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal response is replied to
the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the AC
motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle them.
An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message “CExx” will be
displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code equal to the
exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1, and an
exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:
ASCII mode:
STX
Address Low
Address High
Function Low
Function High
RTU mode:
Address
Function
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘8’
‘6’
‘0’
‘2’
‘7’
‘7’
CR
LF
01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
Exception code
LRC CHK Low
LRC CHK High
END 1
END 0
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
code
Explanation
Illegal function code:
01
02
The function code received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data value:
03
04
The data value received in the command message is not available
for the AC drive.
Slave device failure:
The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.
Communication time-out:
If Pr.09-03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09-02=0~1, and there is no
communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set
by Pr.09-03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09-05 ꢀ Response Delay Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 ~ 200.0 ms
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command
as shown in the following.
RS-485 BUS
Response Message
PC or PLC command
of the AC Drive
Handling time
Response Delay Time
of the AC drive
4-96
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 10 Speed Feedback Control Parameters
10-00 PG Signal Type
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VFPG FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
No function
0
1
ABZ
2
3
4
5
6
ABZ+ Hall
SIN/COS+Sinusoidal
SIN/COS+Endat
SIN/COS
SIN/COS + Hiperface
When Pr.10-00 is set to 3, encoder will have one sine and one cosine signal for each
revolution. The signal must be: 0.75 to 1.2Vpp for the amplitude with phase angle 90°±5 elec.
(EX: ERN 1185 ERN 1387)
When setting is 4 or 6, it needs to wait for 2 seconds after applying the power to execute RUN
command.
Detection of the electromagnetic pole:
Setting 1 or 5: The AC motor drive will output short circuit to detect the position of the
electromagnetic pole. At this moment, the motor will generate a little noise.
Setting 2: The AC motor drive will detect the position of the electromagnetic pole by the UVW
signal of encoder.
Setting 3: The AC motor drive will detect the position of the electromagnetic pole by the sine
signal of encoder.
Setting 4 or 6: The AC motor drive will detect the position of the electromagnetic pole by the
communication signal of encoder.
Reference table for tuning
Setting of PG
PG signal type
Applicable PG card
Pr.08-00=1
Pr.08-00=3
signal type
10-00=1
10-00=2
A, B, Z
EMVL-PGABO/ABL Motor will run Motor will run
A, B, Z+U, V, W
EMVL-PGABL
Motor will run Motor won’t run
Motor will run Motor will run
SIN/COS+
Sinusoidal
10-00=3
EMVL-PGH01/02
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Setting of PG
signal type
PG signal type
Applicable PG card
Pr.08-00=1
Pr.08-00=3
10-00=4
10-00=5
SIN/COS+Endat
SIN/COS
EMVL-PGS01
Motor will run Motor won’t run
Motor will run Motor will run
EMVL-PGH01/02
SIN/COS +
Hiperface
10-00=6
EMVL-PGS01
Motor will run Motor won’t run
10-01 Encoder Pulse
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 600
Control
VFPG FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
1 to 20000
A Pulse Generator (PG) or encoder is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the
motor speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control.
10-02 Encoder Input Type Setting
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VFPG FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Disable
Phase A leads in a forward run command and phase B leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
A
B
Forward
running
Phase B leads in a forward run command and phase A leads in a
reverse run command
FWD
REV
2
3
4
A
B
Forward
running
Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=reverse direction, high input=forward direction)
FWD
REV
A
B
Forward
running
Phase A is a pulse input and phase B is a direction input. (low
input=forward direction, high input=reverse direction)
REV
FWD
A
B
Forward
running
4-98
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Single-phase input
5
Forward
running
A
It is helpful for the stable control by inputting correct pulse type.
10-03 ꢀ Encoder Feedback Fault Treatment (PGF1, PGF2)
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2
VFPG FOCPG TQCPG
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operation
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and stop operation
10-04 ꢀ Detection Time for Encoder Feedback Fault
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.0
VFPG FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 10.0 sec
When PG loss, encoder signal error, pulse signal setting error or signal error, if time exceeds
the detection time for encoder feedback fault (Pr.10-04), the PG signal error will occur. Refer
to the Pr.10-03 for encoder feedback fault treatment.
10-05 ꢀ Encoder Stall Level (PGF5)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 115
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 120% (0: disable)
This parameter determines the maximum encoder feedback signal allowed before a fault
occurs. (max. output frequency Pr.01-00 =100%)
10-06 ꢀ Encoder Stall Detection Time
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.1
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 2.0 sec
10-07 ꢀ Encoder Slip Range (PGF7)
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 50
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 50% (0: disable)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Unit: 0.1
10-08 ꢀ Encoder Slip Detection Time
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.5
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 10.0 sec
10-09 ꢀ Encoder Stall and Slip Error Treatment
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 2
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
When the value of (rotation speed – motor frequency) exceeds Pr.10-07 setting, detection time
exceeds Pr.10-08 or motor frequency exceeds Pr.10-05 setting, it will start to accumulate time.
If detection time exceeds Pr.10-06, the encoder feedback signal error will occur. Refer to
Pr.10-09 encoder stall and slip error treatment.
10-10 Mode Selection for UVW Input
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
VFPG FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
Z signal is at the falling edge of U-phase
Z signal is at the rising edge of U-phase
Setting 0: when the operation is U->V->W, Z signal is at the falling edge of U-phase.
Setting 1: when the operation is U->V->W, Z signal is at the rising edge of U-phase.
Pr.10-10=1
U
V
Z Signal
Z Signal
Pr.10-10=0
10-11 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (P) of Zero Speed
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 500.0%
4-100
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
10-12 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) Control (I) of Zero Speed
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000 to 10.000 sec
10-13 ꢀASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 1
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 500.0%
10-14 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 1
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000 to 10.000 sec
10-15 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (P) 2
Unit: 0.1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 100.0
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 500.0%
10-16 ꢀ ASR (Auto Speed Regulation) control (I) 2
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.100
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000 to 10.000 sec
10-17 ꢀ ASR 1/ASR2 Switch Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 7.00
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 o 120.00Hz
0.00: disable
ASR P determines Proportional control and associated gain (P). ASR I determines integral
control and associated gain (I).
When integral time is set to 0, it is disabled. Pr.10-17 defines the switch frequency for the
ASR1 (Pr.10-13, Pr.10-14) and ASR2 (Pr.10-15, Pr.10-16).
PI
10-15
10-16
10-13
10-14
10-11
10-12
10-20
10-21
10-17
Hz
0Hz
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When using multi-function input terminals to switch ASR1/ASR2, the diagram will be shown as
follows.
Setting multi-function input terminal to 17
(ASR1/ASR2 switch)
ON
OFF
OFF
ASR 2
ASR 1
ASR 1
0.1 sec
0.1 sec
10-18 ꢀ ASR Primary Low Pass Filter Gain
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.008
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.000 to 0.350 sec
It defines the filter time of the ASR command.
When setting to 1, this function is disabled.
10-19 ꢀ Zero Speed Gain (P)
Unit: 0.01
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory Setting: 80.00
Settings
0.00 to 655.00%
When Pr.11-00 is set to Bit 7=1, Pr.10-19 is valid.
10-20 ꢀ Zero Speed/ASR1 Width Adjustment
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 5.00
VFPG FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 120.00Hz
10-21 ꢀ ASR1/ASR2 Width Adjustment
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 5.00
VFPG FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.0 to 120.00Hz
These two parameters are used to decide width of slope of ASR command during zero speed
to low speed or Pr.10-17 to high speed.
4-102
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
PI
10-15
10-16
10-13
10-14
10-11
10-12
10-20
10-21
10-17
Hz
0Hz
10-22 ꢀ Operation Time of Zero Speed
Unit: 0.001
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory Setting: 0.250
Settings
0.001 to 65.535sec
10-23 ꢀ Filter Time of Zero Speed
Unit: 0.001
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory Setting: 0.004
Settings
0.001 to 65.535sec
10-24 ꢀ Time for Executing Zero Speed
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
After the brake release set in Pr.02-29
After the brake signal input (Pr.02-01~02-08 is set to 42)
When Pr.10-24=0, the zero speed control needs to be used with Pr.02-29. (refer to the
explanations in Pr.02-32)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 11 Advanced Parameters
11-00 System Control
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
Bit 0=0
Bit 0=1
Bit 7=0
No function
ASR Auto tuning, PDFF enable
No function
When position control is enabled, it doesn’t need to set Pr.07-02
(DC Brake Current Level)
Bit 7=1
Bit 15=0
Bit 15=1
when power is applied, it will detect the position of magnetic field
again
when power is applied, it will start from the magnetic field
position of previous power failure
Bit 0=1: PDFF function is enabled and system will generate an ASR setting, Pr. 10-11~10-16
will be invalid and Pr.11-09 to 11-10 will be valid.
NO
When Pr.11-00
is setBit 0=1
YES
Setting auto gain adjustment
Pr.11-00=1
Adjust gain value by manual
Pr.11-00=0 (factory setting)
Adjust Pr.11-06, 11-07 and 11-08
separately by speed response
Adjust Pr.10-11, 10-12, 10-13,
10-14, 10-15 and 10-16
separately by speed response
Adjust by requirement
Pr.11-09, Pr. 11-10 (PDFF function)
Adjust by requirement
Pr.10-18 (for general,
no need to adjust)
Adjust by requirement Pr.10-17
(ASR1/ASR2 switch frequency)
Pr.10-20: Zero speed/ASR1 width adjustment
Pr.10-21: ASR1/ASR2 width adjustment
Adjust by requirement Pr.07-25~28 (torque limit)
4-104
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
PI
PI
10-15
10-16
11-08
11-07
10-13
10-14
Pr.11-06
use to adjust the
strength of zero-
servo lock
10-11
10-12
10-21
10-21
10-20
10-20
Hz
Hz
0Hz
PI adjustment-manual gain
0Hz
10-17
10-17
PI adjustment-auto gain
11-01 ꢀ Elevator Speed
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1.00
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.10 to 3.00 m/s
11-02 ꢀ Sheave Diameter
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 400
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
100 to 2000 mm
11-03 ꢀ Mechanical Gear Ratio
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
1 to 100
11-04 ꢀ Suspension Ratio
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 1
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0
1
1:1
2:1
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
suspension ration 1:1
11-02
suspension ration 2:1
reel
sheave diameter
reel
pully
pully
pully
load weight
pully
load weight
carriage
carriage
11-05 ꢀ Inertial Ratio
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 40
Control
FOCPG FOCPM
mode
Settings
1 to 300%
The load inertia can be calculated by the settings of motor parameter, Pr.11-02 Sheave
Diameter, Pr.11-14 Motor Current at Accel. and Pr.11-15 Elevator Acceleration. This
parameter can be used to adjust inertia ratio of load.
11-06 ꢀ Zero-speed Bandwidth
11-07 ꢀ Low-speed Bandwidth
11-08 ꢀ High-speed Bandwidth
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 10
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 40Hz
After estimating inertia and set Pr.11-00=1 (auto tuning), user can adjust parameters Pr.11-06,
11-07 and 11-08 separately by speed response. The larger number you set, the faster
response you will get. Pr.10-08 is the switch frequency for low-speed/high-speed bandwidth.
11-09 ꢀ PDFF Gain Value
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 30
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 200%
4-106
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
After finishing estimating and set Pr.11-00=1 (auto tuning), using Pr.11-09/11-10 to reduce
overshoot. Please adjust PDFF gain value by actual situation.
Besides traditional PI control, it also provides PDFF function to reduce overshoot for speed
control.
1. Get system inertia
2. Set Pr.11-00 to 1
3. Adjust Pr.11-09/11-10 (the larger number is set and the suppressed overshoot function will
be better. But it needs to be used by the actual condition)
PI
PDFF
It is recommended to disable
this function (Pr.11-09=0) for
connection switch and
Y/
ASR1/ASR2 switch application.
ꢀ Gain for Speed Feed Forward
11-10
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 500
Pr.11-09 and Pr.11-10 will be enabled when Pr.11-00 is set to Bit0=1.
11-11 ꢀ Notch Filter Depth
Unit: 1
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0 to 20 db
11-12 ꢀ Notch Filter Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.00
FOCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.00 to 200.00Hz
This parameter is used to set resonance frequency of mechanical system. It can be used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The larger number you set Pr.11-11, the better suppression resonance function you will get.
The notch filter frequency is the resonance of mechanical frequency.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
11-13 ꢀ Low-pass Filter Time of Keypad Display
Unit: 0.001
Control
mode
Factory Setting: 0.500
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
0.001 to 65.535 s
It is used to lower the blinking frequency of LCD display.
11-14 ꢀ Motor Current at Accel.
Unit: 1
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory Setting: 150
Settings
50 to 200%
11-15 ꢀ Elevator Acceleration
Unit: 0.1
Control
FOCPM
mode
Factory Setting: 0.75
Settings
0.60 to 2.00m/s
4-108
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 12 User-defined Parameters
12-00
|
ꢀ User-defined Parameters
12-31
Control
mode
Factory Setting: -
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
-
Users can enter the parameters from group 0 to group 11 into group 12 (it can save 32
parameters). The saved value can also be the parameter addresses (but the hexadecimal
value needs to be converted to decimal value).
Example 1: If you want to enter Pr.08-03 into Pr. 12-00, you only need to enter 0803 into
Pr.12-00. Then it will display the setting of Pr.08-03 in Pr.13-00. Refer to the following figure
for the operation of KPVL-CC01.
SYSTEMSPARAMETER
SEEEEEE60. 000- EE
FREQ. ESET POI NTnt
SEEEEEE60. 0HzEEE
KPVL-CC01
ACCESSEPARAMETER
SEEEEEE60. 012- EE
KPVL-CC01
Press
twice
PROG
DATA
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
PROG
DATA
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 012- 00
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEE08030803 00
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 0020 00
Enter
0803
PROG
DATA
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
PROG
DATA
ACCESSEPARAMETER
SEEEEEE60. 012- EE
KPVL-CC01
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 012- 00
EEE- - EEnd. E- - EEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
MODE
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
f
DI SPLAYEUSER- SET
SEEEEEE60. 013- 00
PMSMOTORUB- Em ET
PMSMOTORUB- Emf ET
SEEEEEE60. 013- 00
PROG
DATA
PROG
DATA
SEEEEEE60. 00V- 00
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RU N STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RU N STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Example 2: If it needs to enter parameter address 2102H and 211BH by the digital keypad,
211BH needs to be converted to binary value before entering.
The setting method of 2102H
Press
twice
SYSTEMSPARAMETER
SEEEEEE60. 000- EE
FREQ. ESET POI NTnt
SEEEEEE60. 0HzEEE
ACCESSEPARAMETER
SEEEEEE60. 012- EE
PROG
DATA
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
PROG
DATA
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 012- 00
enter UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 002000
PROG
DATA
SEEEEE2102080300
2102
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
PROG
DATA
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 012- 00
KPVL-CC01
ACCESSEPARAMETER
EEE- - EEnd . E- - EEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
MODE
SEEEEEE60. 012- EE
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
DI SPLAYEUSER- SET
SEEEEEE60. 013- 00
KPVL-CC01
Fr eq. Ts et poi nt ET
SEEEEEE60. 013- 00
Fr eq. Ts et poi nt ET
PROG
DATA
PROG
DATA
SEEEEEE60. 00Hz 00
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RU N STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RU N STOP JOG FWD R EV EXT PU
4-110
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The setting method of 211BH
Convert 211BH (hexadecimal) to decimal value:
2 1 1 B
1x161+11x160=16+11=27
input 2127
SYSTEMSPARAMETER
FREQ. ESET POI NTnt
SEEEEEE60. 0Hz EEE
KPVL-CC01
ACCESSEPARAMETER
SEEEEEE60. 012- EE
KPVL-CC01
press
twice
PROG
DATA
SEEEEEE60. 000- EE
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
PROG
DATA
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 012- 00
KPVL-CC01
enter UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 0020 00
PROG
DATA
SEEEEE21270803 00
2127
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
PROG
DATA
UMAP_ADD0EEEETEE
SEEEEEE60. 012- 00
KPVL-CC01
ACCESSEPARAMETER
EEE- - EEn d . E- - EEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
MODE
SEEEEEE60. 012- EE
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
DI SPLAYEUSER- SET
SEEEEEE60. 013- 00
KPVL-CC01
Ma x Eof s Fc md i nt ET
SEEEEEE60. 013- 00
Ma x Eof s Fc md i nt ET
PROG
DATA
PROG
DATA
SEEEEEE60. 00HE00
KPVL-CC01
KPVL-CC01
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
RUN STOP JOG FWD REV EXT PU
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 13 View User-defined Parameters
13-00
|
View User-defined Parameters
13-31
Control
mode
Factory Setting: -
VF
VFPG
SVC FOCPG TQCPG FOCPM
Settings
-
Refer to group 12 for details.
4-112
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Over Current (OC)
ocd
OC
ocA
Over-current
Over current
Over-current
during acceleration
during acceleration
Yes
Remove short circuit
or ground fault
Check if there is any short circuits and
grounding between the U, V, W and motor
No
No
No
No
Reduce the load or
increase the power
Yes
If load is too large
No
of AC motor drive
No
Reduce torque
compensation
No
No
Suitable torque
compensation
Yes
Yes
Reduce torque
compensation
Check if
Check if
No
No
deceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
acceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
Yes
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or error
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Is load changed
suddenly?
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Can acceleration
Can deceleration
time be made longer?
time be made longer?
No
No
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Increase accel/decel
time
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Check braking
method. Please
contact DELTA
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.2 Ground Fault
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please
If output circuit(cable or
motor) of AC motor drive
is grounded?
No
GFF
Ground fault
contact DELTA.
Yes
Remove grounding
5.3 Over Voltage (OV)
Over voltage
No
If voltage is within
specification
Reduce voltage to
be within spec.
Yes
Yes
If over-voltage is occurred without load
No
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or
misoperation due to
noise. Please contact
with DELTA.
When OV occurs, check if the
voltage of DC BUS is greater
than protection value
No
Yes
Yes
Increase
deceleration
time
If OV occurs when
sudden acceleration
stops
No
Yes
No
Yes
Increase
acceleration
time
Yes
Increase setting time
No
Need to considerate to
use braking unit and
DC braking
No
Reduce moment
of inertia
Reduce moment of load inertia
No
No
Use braking unit or DC braking
Yes
Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.
5-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.4 Low Voltage (Lv)
Low voltage
Yes
Power cut, including momentary
power loss
Restart after reset
No
Check if there is any malfunction
component or disconnection in
power supply circuit
Yes
Change defective component
and check connection
No
Change power supply
system for requirement
No
Check if voltage is
within specification
Yes
Check if there is heavy load
with high start current in the
same power system
Using the different power
supply for this drive and
heavy load system
Yes
No
No
Check if Lv occurs when
breaker and magnetic
contactor is ON
Yes
Suitable power
transformer capacity
No
Yes
Check if voltage between +1/+2
and - is greater than Pr.06-00
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Control circuit has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.5 Over Heat (OH)
AC motor drive overheats
Heat sink overheats
No
Check if temperature of heat sink
is larger than 90 OC
Temperature detection malfunctions.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Yes
If load is too large
Reduce load
No
No
If cooling fan functions normally
Yes
Change cooling fan
Remove obstruction
Yes
Check if cooling fan is jammed
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please contact
DELTA.
No
Check if surrounding temperature
is within specification
Yes
Adjust surrounding temperature
to specification
5.6 Overload
Overload
EoL1/ot1
No
Check if the setting of electronic
thermal relay is suitable
Modify setting
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
or misoperation due to noise.
No
If load is too large
Yes
Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive
5-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.7 Display of KPVL-CC01 is Abnormal
Abnormal display or no display
Yes
Turn the power off and power
on again after display is off
Fix connector and eliminate noise
No
No
Check if all connectors are connected
well and if there is no noise
Display normal?
Yes
Yes
AC motor drive works normally
AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)
Phase loss
No
Connect all three
phase well
Check if the wiring of terminals R, S and T is OK
Yes
No
Tighten all screws
Check if the screws of terminals are tightened
Yes
Yes
Please check the wiring
and power system for
abnormal power
Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.9 Motor cannot Run
Check if CE01
displays
normally
Check if non-fuse
breaker and magnetic
contactor are ON
No
No
Set them to ON
Motor cannot run
Yes
Yes
Reset after clearing
fault and then RUN
Check if any faults
occur, such as
Lv, PHL or
Check if there is any
fault code displayed
No
Check if input
voltage is normal
disconnection
No
Yes
It can run when
no faults occur
If jumper or DC
reactor is connected
between +1 and +2/B1
No
Input "RUN"
No
command
by keypad
Use jumper
or DC reactor
Yes
Yes
Press RUN key to
check if it can run
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Press UP key to
set frequency
Check if the wiring
of terminal MI1
and between
MI2-DCM is correct
Yes
No
No
No
Check if input FWD
or REV command
Yes
Press UP to
check if motor
can run
Change switch or relay
Yes
No
No
No
Set frequency or not
Yes
Correct connection
Modify frequency
setting
No
if upper bound freq.
and setting freq. is
lower than the min.
output freq.
Check if the parameter
setting and wiring of
analog signal and
multi-step speed
are correct
Change defective
Yes
potentiometer and
relay
No
Motor has malfunction
Check if there is any
output voltage from
terminals U, V and W
No
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
No
If load is too large
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check if motor
connection
is correct
Connect correctly
Check if the setting
of torque
Yes
compensation
is correct
Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.
For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.
No
Increase the setting of
torque compensation
5-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
Motor can run but
cannot change speed
Check if the setting of the
max. frequency is too low
Yes
Modify the setting
No
No
If the setting of frequency
is out of range(upper/lower)
bound
Yes
Modify the setting
No
Press UP/DOWN key
to see if speed has
any change
Yes
Yes
No
If there is any change
of the signal that sets
frequency (-10V-10V
and 4-20mA)
If the setting of
Pr.04-00 to Pr.04-14
are the same
Yes
No
No
Check if the wiring between
MI1~MI8 to COM is correct
No
Check if the wiring of
external terminal is correct
No
Yes
Connect
correctly
Yes
Check if frequency for
each step is different
Change defective
potentiometer
No
Yes
Change frequency setting
No
If accel./decel. time
is very long
Yes
Please set suitable
accel./decel. time by
load inertia
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration
Yes
Check if acceleration
time is too short
Motor stalls during
acceleration
Increase setting time
Yes
No
Check if the inertia
of motor and load
are very high
Yes
Use special motor?
No
No
Thicken or shorten the
wiring between the
motor or AC motor drive
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Check if the voltage of
terminal is lower than
before
Yes
No
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Yes
Check if the load torque
is too high
No
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact
DELTA
Check if the torque
compensation is suitable
Yes
No
Increase torque compensation
5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected
Check if V/f characteristic
Motor does not run
as expected
No
Adjust V/f characteristic
and lower torque compensation
and torque compensation
is suitable
Yes
Yes
Please use specific motor
Run in low speed continuously
No
Yes
Reduce load or increase the
capacity of AC motor drive
If load is too large
No
Yes
Check if output voltage of U, V W
is balanced
Motor has malfunction
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
5-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise
There are many noises surround the AC motor drives and invade it by radiation or power circuit. It
may cause the misoperation of control circuit and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, that
is a solution to increase the noise tolerance of AC motor drive. But it is not the best one due to the
limit. Therefore, solve it from the outside as following will be the best.
1.
2.
Add surge killer on the relay or contact to suppress switching surge between ON/OFF.
Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial circuit and separate from the main
circuit wiring.
3.
4.
5.
Comply with the wiring regulation for those shielded wire and use isolation amplifier for
long wire.
The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulation and ground independently,
i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machine and power equipment.
Connect a noise filter at the input terminal of the AC motor drive to prevent noise from
power circuit.
In a word, three-level solutions for electromagnetic noise are “no product”, “no spread” and
“no receive”.
5.14 Environmental Condition
Since AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental condition
stated in the appendix A. Following are the remedial measures for necessary.
1.
To prevent vibration, anti-vibration spacer is the last choice. The vibration tolerance must
be within the specification. The vibration effect is equal to the mechanical stress and it
cannot occur frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damaging AC motor drive.
Store in a clean and dry location free from corrosive fumes/dust to prevent rustiness, poor
contact. It also may cause short by low insulation in a humid location. The solution is to
use both paint and dust-proof. For particular occasion, use the enclosure with whole-seal
structure.
2.
3.
The surrounding temperature should be within the specification. Too high or low
temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage
will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to clean and
periodical check for the air cleaner and cooling fan besides having cooler and sunshade.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
In additional, the microcomputer may not work in extreme low temperature and needs to
have heater.
4.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment. Do
not turn off the air conditioner and have exsiccator for it.
5.15 Affecting Other Machines
AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machine due to many reasons. The solutions are
as follows.
„ High Harmonic at Power Side
If there is high harmonic at power side during running, the improved methods are:
1.
2.
Separate power system: use transformer for AC motor drive.
Use reactor at the power input terminal of AC motor drive or decrease high harmonic by
multiple circuit.
3.
If there is phase lead capacitor, it should use serial reactor to prevent capacitor damage
from high harmonic.
serial reactor
phase lead capacitor
„ Motor Temperature Rises
When the motor is induction motor with ventilation-cooling-type used in variety speed
operation, bad cooling will happen in the low speed. Therefore, it may overheat. Besides,
high harmonic is in output waveform to increase copper loss and iron loss. Following
measures should be used by load situation and operation range when necessary.
1.
Use the motor with independent power ventilation or increase the horsepower.
Use inverter duty motor.
2.
3.
Do NOT run in the low speed
5-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance
6.1 Fault Code Information
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different
alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be
activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.
The six most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
The AC motor drive is made up by numerous components, such as electronic components,
including IC, resistor, capacity, transistor, and cooling fan, relay, etc. These components can’t be
used permanently. They have limited-life even under normal operation. Preventive maintenance is
required to operate this AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life.
Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:
„ Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via
keypad of input terminal.
≦
„ When the power is off after 5 minutes for
22kW models and 10 minutes
≧
for
30kW models, please confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-. The voltage
between DC+ and DC- should be less than 25VDC.
„ Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.
Please take off any metal objects, such as watches and rings, before
operation. And only insulated tools are allowed.
„ Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
„ Make sure that installation environment comply with regulations without
abnormal noise, vibration and smell.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions
Following fault name will only be displayed when using with optional digital keypad KPVL-
CC01.
fault description
o c Ea t EAc c e l EEEEE
Fa u l t
___E
Co d e: _E_
Display of driver status
Fault code number
=Forward running
=Reverse running
S=Stop
R=Run
F=Fault
Display
Description
Over-current during acceleration
(Output current exceeds triple rated current during
acceleration.)
Corrective Actions:
oc Ea t EAc c el EEEEE
1.
2.
3.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor
insulation at the output lines.
Acceleration Time too short: Increase the Acceleration
Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the
AC motor drive with the next higher power model.
FEEEFau l t
E
Co de : 01
Over-current during deceleration
(Output current exceeds triple rated current during
deceleration.)
Corrective Actions:
o c Ea t EDec e l EEEEE
FEEE a u
1.
2.
3.
Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor
insulation at the output line.
Deceleration Time too short: Increase the Deceleration
Time.
AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the
AC motor drive with the next higher power model.
F
l
t
E
od e: 0 2
C
Over-current during steady state operation
(Output current exceeds triple rated current during constant
speed.)
Corrective Actions:
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for possible poor
insulation at the output line.
o c Ea t ENor ma l ESPD
0 3
Fa u l t
FEEE
o d e:
E
C
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for possible
motor stall.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small: Replace the
AC motor drive with the next higher power model.
6-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Display
Description
Ground fault
Corrective Actions:
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded, short
circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor drive rated
current, the AC motor drive power module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided for AC
motor drive protection, not for protection of the user.
1. Check the wiring connections between the AC motor
drive and motor for possible short circuits, also to
ground.
Gr ou nd EFa u l t EEEE
Fa u l t
FEEE
Co de : 0E4
2. Check whether the IGBT power module is damaged.
3. Check for possible poor insulation at the output line.
Short-circuit is detected between upper bridge and lower
bridge of the IGBT module.
Sh or t EFau l t EEEEE
Fa u l t
od e :
0E5
FEEE
C
Corrective Actions:
Return to the factory
Over-current at stop
oc Ea t ESt o p EEEEEE
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
Return to the factory
FEEE
o de : 0E6
C
DC BUS over-voltage during acceleration (230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
Corrective Actions:
1.
Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage,
please increase the Deceleration Time or add an
optional brake resistor.
ov Ea t E c c e l EEEEE
FEEEFa u l t o d e : 0E7
C
2.
3.
DC BUS over-voltage during deceleration (230V: DC 450V;
460V: DC 900V)
Corrective Actions:
1.
Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage,
please increase the Deceleration Time or add an
optional brake resistor.
ov Ea t EDec e l EEEEE
Fau l t
FEEE
Co d e :
E
08
2.
3.
DC BUS over-voltage during constant speed (230V: DC
450V; 460V: DC 900V)
Corrective Actions:
1.
Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
If DC BUS over-voltage due to regenerative voltage,
please increase the Deceleration Time or add an
optional brake resistor.
ov Ea t ENor al ESPD
FEEE a u 09E
F
l
t
Co d e:
2.
3.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Display
Description
DC BUS over-voltage at stop
Corrective Actions:
ov Ea t ESt o p EEEEEE
Fau l t o d e:
1 0E
1.
Check if the input voltage falls within the rated AC
FEEE
C
motor drive input voltage range.
2.
Check for possible voltage transients.
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 during acceleration.
Lv Ea t EAc c e l EEEEE
1 1
Corrective Actions:
FEEEFa u l t
E
Co de :
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 during deceleration.
Lv Ea t EDec e l EEEEE
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
od e:
C
FEEE
1E2
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
DC BUS voltage is less than Pr.06-00 during constant speed.
Lv Ea t ENor mal ESPD
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Cod e: 1 3E
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
Low voltage at stop
Lv Ea t ESt o p EEEEEE
Fa u l t
E
Corrective Actions:
o de : 1 4
FEEE
C
1.
2.
Check if the input voltage is normal
Check for possible sudden load
Phase loss
Ph as eEL os s EEEE
FEEEFa u l t o de : 1 5E
C
Corrective Actions:
Check Power Source Input if all 3 input phases are
connected without loose contacts.
IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature exceeds protection level
1 to15HP: 90 oC
20 to 100HP: 100 oC
Corrective Actions:
1.
2.
3.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the
specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Check the fan and clean it.
I GBTEOv er EHea t EE
Fa u l t
o d e : 16
E
FEEE
C
4.
5.
Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation.
6-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Display
Description
IGBT overheating
IGBT temperature exceeds protection level
40 to100HP: 100 oC
Corrective Actions:
1.
2.
3.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the
specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Remove any foreign objects from the heatsinks and
check for possible dirty heat sink fins.
Check the fan and clean it.
He at ESi nk Eo Ha t EE
Fa u l t
17
E
FEEE
Co d e :
4.
5.
Provide enough spacing for adequate ventilation.
IGBT hardware failure
I GBTEHWEEr r en EEE
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
Return to the factory
Heatsink overheating
FEEE
Cod e: 1 8E
He at ESi nk EHWEEr r
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
Return to the factory
Fan failure
FEEE
Cod e: 1 9E
Fa nELo c k e d EEEEEE
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Co de : 2E0
1.
2.
Make sure that the fan is not obstructed.
Return to the factory
Overload
The AC motor drive detects excessive drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor drive can withstand up to 150% of
the rated current for a maximum of 60 seconds.
I n v e r t e r Eo L EEEEE
Fa u l t
FEEE
Cod e: 2E1
Corrective Actions:
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
2. Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Motor 1 overload
Corrective Actions:
Th e r ma l ERe l ay
E
1
1.
2.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Check whether the rated current of motor (Pr.05-01) is
suitable
FEEE
Fa u l t
o d e : 2 E2
C
3.
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Motor overheating
The AC motor drive detects that the internal temperature
exceeds Pr.06-30 (PTC level)
Mo t o r EOv e r EHe at E
Fa u l t 24
E
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Co de :
1.
2.
Make sure that the motor is not obstructed.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls within the
specified temperature range.
3.
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Display
Description
Electronic Thermal Relay 1 Protection
Corrective Actions:
1.
2.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Check whether motor rated current setting (Pr.05-01)
is suitable
Ov er ET o r q u e E1 EEE
2 6
FEEEFa u l t o de :
E
C
3.
4.
Check electronic thermal relay function
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Electronic Thermal Relay 2 Protection
Corrective Actions:
1.
2.
Check whether the motor is overloaded.
Check whether motor rated current setting (Pr.05-01)
is suitable
Ov er ET o r q u e E2 EEE
a u 2 7
E
t
FEEEF
l
Cod e :
3.
4.
Check electronic thermal relay function
Take the next higher power AC motor drive model.
Internal EEPROM can not be programmed.
EEPROMEWri t eEEr r
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
Co de :
FEEE
30E
1.
2.
Press “RESET” key to the factory setting.
Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be read.
EEPROMERe a d EEr r E
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Co d e: 3E1
1.
2.
Press “RESET” key to the factory setting.
Return to the factory.
Hardware failure in current detection
I s umESe ns o r EEr r E
au
Corrective Actions:
F
l t
Co d e: 32E
FEEE
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
U-phase error
I a s ESe n s o r EEr r EE
a u 3 3
Corrective Actions:
FEEEF l t Cod e :
E
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
V-phase error
I b s ESe n s o r EEr r EE
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
o de : 3 4
FEEE
C
E
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
W-phase error
I c s ESe n s o r EEr r EE
Fau l t
3 5
Corrective Actions:
o de :
FEEE
C
E
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
CC (current clamp)
c c EHWEEr r o r EEEEE
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
FEEE
Co d e: 3E6
6-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Display
Description
OC hardware error
oc EHWEEr r o r EEEEE
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Fa u l t
Co d e: 3E7
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
OV hardware error
ov EHWEEr r o r EEEEE
Fa u l t od e :
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
C
3E8
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
GFF hardware error
GF FEHWEEr r o r EEEE
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Co de : 39E
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
Auto tuning error
Corrective Actions:
Au t o ETu ni n g EEr r E
Fa u l t
1.
2.
3.
Check cabling between drive and motor
Check the motor capacity and parameters settings
Retry again
Co de :
FEEE
4E0
PID loss (ACI)
PI DEFb k EEr r or EEE
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
Co d e: 1E
1.
2.
Check the wiring of the PID feedback
Check the PID parameters settings
PG feedback error
PGEFbk EEr r o r EEEE
au
Corrective Actions:
Check if Pr.10-01 is not set to 0 when it is PG feedback
t
FEEEF
l
o d e:
E
4 2
C
control
PG feedback loss
PGEFbk ELo s s EEEEE
a u
4 3
Corrective Actions:
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
t
FEEEF
l
od e:
E
C
PG feedback stall
Corrective Actions:
PGEFbk EOv e r ESPDE
Fa u l t
44
E
1.
2.
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is
suitable
FEEE
Cod e:
3.
Return to the factory
PG slip error
Corrective Actions:
PGEFbk EDe v i at eEE
Fa u l t
1.
2.
Check the wiring of the PG feedback
Check if the setting of PI gain and deceleration is
od e:
4E5
FEEE
C
suitable
3.
Return to the factory
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Display
Description
Pulse input error
Corrective Actions:
PGERef EEr r o r EEEE
Fa u l t
Cod e:
FEEE
4E6
1.
2.
Check the pulse wiring
Return to the factory
Pulse input loss
PGERef ELo s s EEEEE
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
o d e:
4E7
FEEE
C
1.
2.
Check the pulse wiring
Return to the factory
ACI loss
ACI ELo s s EEEEEEEE
Fau l t
o de :
4 8E
Corrective Actions:
FEEE
C
1.
2.
Check the ACI wiring
Check if the ACI signal is less than 4mA
External Fault
Corrective Actions:
Ex t e r n a l EFa ul t EE
Fau l t
1.
Input EF (N.O.) on external terminal is closed to GND.
FEEE
Co de : 4E9
Output U, V, W will be turned off.
2.
Give RESET command after fault has been cleared.
Emergency stop
Corrective Actions:
Emer ge n c y ESt o pEE
FEEEFau l t
1.
When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to MI8 are
E
0
Co de :
5
set to emergency stop and the AC motor drive stops
output.
2.
Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
Base Block
Corrective Actions:
Ba s e EBl oc k EEEEEE
Fa u l t
E
5 1
1. When the multi-function input terminals MI1 to MI8 are
set to base block and the AC motor drive stops output.
2. Press RESET after fault has been cleared.
Password is locked
od e:
FEEE
C
Pa s s wo r dEEr r o r EE
Fau l t
Corrective Actions:
o d e:
5E2
FEEE
C
Keypad will be locked. Turn the power ON after power OFF
to re-enter the correct password. See Pr.00-07 and 00-08.
Illegal function code
PCEEr r ECo mman dEE
Corrective Actions:
Check if the function code is correct (function code must be
03, 06, 10, 63)
a u
FEEEF l t od e: 54E
C
Illegal data length
PCEEr r EAd d r es s EE
Corrective Actions:
Check if the communication data length is correct.
Fau l t
o d e :
5 5E
FEEE
C
Illegal data value
PCEEr r EDa t a EEEEE
Fa u l t
Corrective Actions:
Check if the data value exceeds max./min. value.
FEEE
Cod e: 5 6
E
6-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Description
Display
illegal communication address
PCESl a v eEFa ul t EE
Corrective Actions:
Check if the communication address is correct.
Fa u l t
od e:
C
FEEE
5E7
Communication time-out
PCETi me EOu t ul t EE
Fau l t o de :
5E8
Corrective Actions:
Check if the wiring for the communication is correct.
FEEE
C
Keypad (KPVL-CC01) communication time-out
PUETi me EOu t ul t EE
FEEEFa u l t o d e:
Corrective Actions:
E
C
5 9
1.
2.
Check if the wiring for the communication is correct
Check if there is any wrong with the keypad
Brake chopper fail
p pe
Br k Cho
r
Fa i l
EEE
E
Corrective Actions:
FEEEFa u l t
6 0E
Co d e:
Press RESET key to correct it. If fault code is still displayed
on the keypad, please return to the factory.
Safety loop error
Corrective Actions:
Sa f e t y ERe l a y EEr r
Fau l t
1.
2.
Check if the jumper JP18 is short circuit.
Co d e:
FEEE
63E
Re-power on to try it. If fault code is still displayed on the
keypad, please return to the factory.
Mechanical brake error
Corrective Actions:
Mec h eBr ak e u Fa i l E
FEEEFau l t o de : 6 4E
C
1.
2.
Check if the mechanical brake signal is correct.
Check if the detection time setting of mechanical brake
(Pr.02-35) is correct.
PG hardware error
Corrective Actions:
1.
2.
Check if the wiring of PG feedback is correct.
If fault code is still displayed on the keypad with
correct PG feedback, please return to the factory.
P Gc H BEr r o r Fa i l E
FEEEFau l t o de : 6 5E
C
6.1.2 Reset
There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:
STOP
RESET
1.
2.
3.
Press
key on KPVL-CC01.
Set external terminal to “RESET” and then set to be ON.
Send “RESET” command by communication.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
NOTE
Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or
personal injury due to immediate operation.
6-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6.2 Maintenance and Inspections
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between DC+ and DC-. The voltage between DC+ and DC-
should be less than 25VDC.
„
Ambient environment
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and see if
there are any dust, gas, oil or
water drops
Visual inspection and measurement
with equipment with standard
specification
{
{
If there are any dangerous
objects
Visual inspection
„
Voltage
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Check if the voltage of main
circuit and control circuit is
correct
Measure with multimeter with standard
specification
{
„
Keypad
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Is the display clear for reading
Any missing characters
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
„
Mechanical parts
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any abnormal sound
or vibration
Visual and aural inspection
Tighten the screws
{
If there are any loose screws
{
{
If any part is deformed or
damaged
Visual inspection
If there is any color change by
overheating
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
If there is any dust or dirt
„
Main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there are any loose or missing
screws
Tighten or replace the screw
{
If machine or insulator is
deformed, cracked, damaged or
with color change due to
overheating or ageing
Visual inspection
NOTE: Please ignore the color
change of copper plate
{
{
If there is any dust or dirt
Visual inspection
„
Terminals and wiring of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If the terminal or the plate is
color change or deformation due Visual inspection
to overheat
{
If the insulator of wiring is
Visual inspection
{
damaged or color change
If there is any damage
Visual inspection
{
6-12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
„
DC capacity of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any leak of liquid,
color change, crack or
deformation
Visual inspection
{
If the safety valve is not
removed? If valve is inflated?
Visual inspection
{
{
Measure static capacity when
required
„
Resistor of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any peculiar smell or
insulator cracks due to overheat
Visual inspection, smell
Visual inspection
{
{
If there is any disconnection
If connection is damaged?
Measure with multimeter with standard
specification
{
„
Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any abnormal vibration
or peculiar smell
Visual, aural inspection and smell
{
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
„
Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there are any loose screws
If the contact works correctly
Visual and aural inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
„
Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there are any loose screws and
connectors
Tighten the screws and press the
connectors firmly in place.
{
If there is any peculiar smell and
color change
Visual and smell inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
{
If there is any crack, damage,
deformation or corrosion
If there is any liquid is leaked or
deformation in capacity
Visual inspection
„
Cooling fan of cooling system
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Visual, aural inspection and turn the
fan with hand (turn off the power
before operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration
{
If there is any loose screw
Tighten the screw
Change fan
{
{
If there is any color change due to
overheat
6-14
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
„
Ventilation channel of cooling system
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any obstruction in the
heat sink, air intake or air outlet
Visual inspection
{
NOTE
Please use the neutral cloth for clean and use dust cleaner to remove dust when necessary.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
This page intentionally left blank
6-16
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications
There are 230V and 460V models for customers to choose by their requirement.
Voltage Class
230V Class
150 185
Model Number VFD-XXXVL
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW)
055
5.5
075
7.5
110
11
220
22
300
30
370
37
15
18.5
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
7.5
9.5
10
15
19
20
25
25
29
30
34
40
46
50
55
12.5
Rated Output Current for
General Purposes (A)
**Rated Output Current for
Elevators (A)
21.9
25
27.1
31
41.1
47
53
60
70
80
79
90
120
150
146
183
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
Output Frequency (Hz)
3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage
0.00~120.00 Hz
12kHz
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
9kHz
Rated Input Current (A)
Rated Voltage/Frequency
25
31
10
47
10
60
3-phase
200-240V, 50/60Hz
±10%(180~264 V)
±5%(47~63 Hz)
Fan Cooled
80
90
13
106
36
126
36
Voltage Tolerance
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
8
13
13
Voltage Class
460V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXVL
055
075
7.5
110
150
15
185
220
22
300
370
37
450
550
55
750
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW) 5.5
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp) 7.5
11
18.5
30
45
75
10
15
18
20
24
25
29
30
34
40
46
50
56
60
69
75
80
100
100
Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
9.9
13.7
Rated Output Current for
General Purposes (A)
**Rated Output Current for
Elevators (A)
12.3 15.8
21
24
27
31
34
39
41
47
60
75
73
91
91
110
138
150
188
14
18
113
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
Output Frequency (Hz)
3-phase Proportional to Input Voltage
0.00~120.00 Hz
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
15kHz
31
9kHz
67
6kHz
101 122
Rated Input Current (A)
Rated Voltage
14
18
24
39
47
56
87
36
3-phase 380 to 480 V, 50/60Hz
±10%(342~528 V)
±5%(47~63 Hz)
Voltage Tolerance
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Fan Cooled
Weight (kg)
8
10
10
13
13
13
36
36
50
50
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
NOTE
**Rated Output Current for Elevators (A)
Elevator Duty
250
#2
200
150
100
50
*2
#5
*1
#6
#3
10
*6
Current
#7
0
-50
(%)
*7
20
30
40
*3
50
*5
60
#4
-100
-150
-200
-250
#1
*4
Time (seconds)
Event
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
*1
Description
Per torque
Accel up
Cruise
Time(s)
Current
100%
175%
100%
115%
140%
100%
0%
1.5
3
10
3
Decel up
Post
1.5
1
Per torque
Rest
10
1.5
3
Per torque
Accel up
Cruise
100%
140%
80%
*2
*3
10
3
*4
Decel up
Post
140%
140%
100%
0%
*5
1.5
1
*6
Per torque
Rest
*7
10
A-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
General Specifications
Control System
Start Torque
1: V/f, 2: VF+PG, 3: SVC, 4: FOC+PG, 5: TQR+PG, 6:FOC+PM
Starting torque is 150% at 0.5Hz and 0Hz with control modes FOC + PG and
FOC+PM
Speed Control Range
1:100 Sensorless vector (up to 1:1000 when using PG card)
±0.5% Sensorless vector (up to±0.02% when using PG card)
5Hz (up to 30Hz for vector control)
Speed Control Resolution
Speed Response Ability
Max. Output Frequency
Output Frequency Accuracy
0.00 to 120.00Hz
Digital command ±0.005%, analog command ±0.5%
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital command ±0.01Hz, analog command: 1/4096(12-bit) of the max. output
frequency
Torque Limit
Max. is 200% torque current
±5%
Torque Accuracy
Accel/Decel Time
V/f Curve
0.00 to 600.00/0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
Adjustable V/f curve using 4 independent points and square curve
0-+10V, ±10V, 4~20mA
Frequency Setting Signal
Brake Torque
About 20%
Motor Protection
Over-current Protection
Electronic thermal relay protection
The current forces 220% of the over-current protection and 300% of the rated
current
Ground Leakage Current
Protection
Higher than 50% rated current
Overload Ability
Constant torque: 150% for 60 seconds, variable torque: 200% for 3 seconds
Over-voltage level: Vdc > 400/800V; low-voltage level: Vdc < 200/400V
Over-voltage Protection
Over-voltage Protection for
the Input Power
Varistor (MOV)
Over-temperature Protection Built-in temperature sensor
Compensation for the
Up to 5 seconds for parameter setting
Momentory Power Loss
Protection Level
NEMA 1/IP20
-10°C to 45°C
Operation Temperature
Storage Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Vibration
-20°C to 60°C
Below 90% RH (non-condensing)
9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz
Installation Location
Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust
Approvals
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
This page intentionally left blank
A-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories
General Precautions
„ This VFD-VL AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control
tests at the factory before shipment. If the package is damaged during
shipping, please contact your dealer.
„ The accessories produced by Delta are only for using with Delta AC motor
drive. Do NOT use with other drive to prevent damage.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
Applicable
Motor
Full Load
Torque
Nm
Resistor value spec
for each AC Motor
Drive
Min. Equivalent
Resistor Value for each
AC Motor Drive
Brake Torque
10%ED
hp kW
2400W 16Ω
3000W 12Ω
4800W 9Ω
16Ω
12Ω
9Ω
7.5 5.5
10 7.5
3.111
4.148
6.186
8.248
10.281
12.338
16.497
20.6
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
125
15
20
11
15
4800W 6.8Ω
6000W 6Ω
6.8Ω
6Ω
25 18.5
9600W 5Ω
5Ω
30
40
50
22
30
37
6000W 5Ω
5Ω
9600W 4Ω
4Ω
500W 50Ω
50Ω
40Ω
33Ω
25Ω
21Ω
19Ω
20Ω
16Ω
13.6Ω
10Ω
6.8Ω
7.5 5.5
10 7.5
3.111
4.148
6.186
8.248
10.281
12.338
16.497
20.6
1000W 40Ω
1000W 33Ω
1500W 25Ω
4800W 21Ω
4800W 19Ω
6000W 20Ω
9600W 16Ω
9600W 13.6Ω
12000W 10Ω
19200W 6.8Ω
15
20
11
15
25 18.5
30
40
50
60
75
22
30
37
45
55
24.745
31.11
42.7
100 75
NOTE
1.
2.
Please select the recommended resistance value (Watt) and the duty-cycle value (ED%).
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the brake usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time for the
brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When the brake
resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake torque would
decrease accordingly. Recommended cycle time is one minute.
100%
T1
ED% = T1/T0x100(%)
Brake Time
T0
Cycle Time
3.
For safety consideration, install an overload relay between the brake unit and the brake resistor.
In conjunction with the magnetic contactor (MC) prior to the drive, it can perform complete
protection against abnormality. The purpose of installing the thermal overload relay is to protect
B-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
the brake resistor from damage due to frequent brake, or due to brake unit keeping operating
resulted from unusual high input voltage. Under such circumstance, just turn off the power to
prevent damaging the brake resistor.
4.
If damage to the drive or other equipment are due to the fact that the brake resistors and the
brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.
If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of the
Watt figures.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to switch
power off to the AC motor drive!
When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t be
less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC Drive” (the
right-most column in the table).
9.
Please read the wiring information in the user manual of brake unit thoroughly prior to taking
into operation.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
(Dimensions are in millimeter)
Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W070, BR300W100, BR300W250,
BR300W400, BR400W150, BR400W040
Model no.
L1
L2
H
D
W
Max. Weight (g)
160
BR080W200
BR080W750
BR300W070
BR300W100
BR300W250
BR300W400
BR400W150
BR400W040
140
125
20
5.3
60
215
265
200
250
30
30
5.3
5.3
60
60
750
930
B-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1K0W020, BR1K0W075
Max. Weight
(g)
Model no.
L1
L2
H
D
W
60
BR500W030
BR500W100
BR1K0W020
BR1K0W075
335
400
320
385
30
50
5.3
5.3
1100
2800
100
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040
B.1.2 Specifications for Brake Unit
230V Series
460V Series
2015
15
2022
22
4030
30
4045
45
4132
132
Max. Motor Power (kW)
Max. Peak Discharge Current
(A) 10%ED
Continuous Discharge Current
(A)
40
15
60
20
40
15
60
18
240
75
330/345/360/380 660/690/720/760/
618/642/667/690
/725/750±6V
Brake Start-up Voltage (DC)
/400/415±3V
800/830±6V
DC Voltage
200~400VDC
400~800VDC
Temperature over +95°C (203 oF)
Heat Sink Overheat
Alarm Output
Relay contact 5A 120VAC/28VDC (RA, RB, RC)
Blackout until bus (+~-) voltage is below 50VDC
Power Charge Display
Installation Location
Operating Temperature
Storage Temperature
Humidity
Indoor (no corrosive gases, metallic dust)
-10°C ∼ +50°C (14oF to 122oF)
-20°C ∼ +60°C (-4oF to 140oF)
90% Non-condensing
9.8m/s2 (1G) under 20Hz
Vibration
2m/s2 (0.2G) at 20~50Hz
Wall-mounted Enclosed Type
IP50
IP10
B-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.1.3 Dimensions for Brake Unit
(Dimensions are in millimeter[inch])
VFDB2015, VFDB2022, VFDB4030, VFDB4045
121.0 [4.76]
130.0 [5.12]
80.0 [3.15]
R3.3 [R0.13]
CHARGE
GREEN
ACT.
YELLOW
ERR.
RED
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
VFDB4132
CHARGE ACT
OC
OH
VFDB4132
B-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.2 Non-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart
For 1-phase/3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be within 2-4 times maximum input
current rating.
3-phase
Recommended Input
Current (A)
Recommended Input
Current (A)
Model
Model
VFD055VL23A
VFD055VL43A
VFD075VL23A
VFD075VL43A
VFD110VL23A
VFD110VL43A
VFD150VL23A
VFD150VL43A
VFD185VL23A
VFD185VL43A
50
30
VFD220VL23A
VFD220VL43A
VFD300VL23A
VFD300VL43A
VFD370VL23A
VFD370VL43A
VFD450VL43A
VFD550VL43A
VFD750VL43A
175
100
225
125
250
150
175
250
300
60
40
100
50
125
60
150
75
B.3 Fuse Specification Chart
Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.
Line Fuse
Bussmann P/N
JJN-50
I (A)
I (A)
Model
Input
Output
I (A)
50
VFD055VL23A
VFD055VL43A
VFD075VL23A
VFD075VL43A
VFD110VL23A
VFD110VL43A
VFD150VL23A
VFD150VL43A
VFD185VL23A
VFD185VL43A
VFD220VL23A
VFD220VL43A
26
14
34
19
50
25
60
32
75
39
90
49
25
13
33
18
49
24
65
32
75
38
90
45
30
JJN-30
60
JJN-60
40
JJN-40
100
50
JJN-100
JJN-50
125
60
JJN-125
JJN-60
150
75
JJN-150
JJN-70
175
100
JJN-175
JJN-100
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Line Fuse
Bussmann P/N
I (A)
I (A)
Model
Input
Output
I (A)
225
125
250
150
175
250
300
VFD300VL23A
VFD300VL43A
VFD370VL23A
VFD370VL43A
VFD450VL43A
VFD550VL43A
VFD750VL43A
110
60
120
60
JJN-225
JJN-125
JJN-250
JJN-150
JJN-175
JJN-250
JJN-300
142
63
145
73
90
91
130
160
110
150
B-10
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.4 AC Reactor
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
kW
HP
Amps
3% impedance
2.5
5% impedance
4.2
5.5
7.5
11
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
12
18
25
35
35
45
18
27
1.5
1.2
0.8
0.8
0.7
2.5
2
37.5
52.5
52.5
67.5
15
1.2
1.2
1.2
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
40
50
55
80
82.5
120
120
150
195
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.85
0.7
60
80
0.7
75
100
130
0.45
0.3
100
B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value
230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
kW
HP
Amps
3% impedance
5% impedance
5.5
7.5
11
1.2
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
25
35
37.5
52.5
82.5
120
120
150
195
240
0.5
0.4
0.8
0.5
0.4
0.4
0.3
55
0.25
0.2
15
80
18.5
22
80
0.2
100
130
160
0.15
0.1
30
37
0.2
0.075
0.15
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
kW
HP
Amps
3% impedance
5% impedance
5.5
7.5
11
18
27
1.5
1.5
1.2
0.8
0.7
0.7
2.5
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
75
100
18
27
2.5
2
25
37.5
52.5
67.5
67.5
15
35
1.2
1.2
1.2
18.5
22
45
45
30
37
45
55
75
80
80
120
120
150
195
240
0.4
0.4
0.7
0.7
100
130
160
0.3
0.45
0.3
0.2
0.15
0.23
B.4.3 Applications for AC Reactor
Connected in input circuit
Application 1
Question
When more than one AC motor drive is
connected to the same power, one of them
is ON during operation.
When applying to one of the AC motor
drive,
the charge current of capacity may cause
voltage ripple. The AC motor drive may
damage when over current occurs during
operation.
B-12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Correct wiring
reactor
M1
M2
motor
AC motor drive
AC motor drive
motor
Mn
motor
AC motor drive
Application 2
Question
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive is
connected to the same power.
Surges will be generated at the instant of
silicon rectifier switching on/off. These
surges may damage the mains circuit.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Correct wiring
silicon rectifier
power
reactor
DC
AC motor drive
reactor
motor
Application 3
Question
Used to improve the input power factor, to
reduce harmonics and provide protection
from AC line disturbances. (surges,
switching spikes, short interruptions, etc.).
AC line reactor should be installed when the
power supply capacity is 500kVA or more
and exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity,
When power capacity is too large, line
impedance will be small and the charge
current will be too large. That may damage
AC motor drive due to higher rectifier
temperature.
or the mains wiring distance 10m.
≤
Correct wiring
small-capacity
AC motor drive
large-capacity
power
reactor
motor
B-14
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Zero Phase Reactor
Recommended Wire
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2
T/L3 W/T3
Cable
type
(Note)
Power
Supply
Size
MOTOR
Wiring
Method
Qty.
Nominal
(mm2)
AWG mm2
Note 1: The table above gives approximate
wire size for the zero phase reactors but the
selection is ultimately governed by the type
and diameter of cable fitted i.e. the cable
must fit through the center hole of zero
phase reactors.
Diagram
A
≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5
≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38
≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5
≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50
1
4
1
4
Single-
core
Diagram
B
Diagram
A
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should
pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Three-
core
Diagram
B
Note 3: When long motor output cables are
used an output zero phase reactor may be
required to reduce radiated emissions from
the cable.
Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.
Diagram A
Please wind each wire 4 times around the
core. The reactor must be put at inverter
output as close as possible.
Zero Phase Reactor
R/L1 U/T1
Power
S/L2 V/T2
MOTOR
Supply
T/L3
W/T3
Diagram B
Please put all wires through 4 cores in
series without winding.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B.6 DC Choke Recommended Values
230V DC Choke
Input voltage
kW
5.5
7.5
11
HP
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
DC Amps Inductance (mh)
32
40
62
92
110
125
-
0.85
0.75
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
230Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
15
18.5
22
30
37
50
-
Built-in
460V DC Choke
Input voltage
kW
5.5
7.5
11
HP
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
40
DC Amps Inductance (mh)
18
25
32
50
62
80
92
3.75
4.00
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
15
18.5
22
460Vac
50/60Hz
3-Phase
30
50
60
110
125
200
240
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
Built-in
37
45
55
75
75
100
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.7 Digital Keypad KPVL-CC01
The digital keypad is the display of VFD-VL series. The following keypad appearance is only for
reference and please see the product for actual appearance.
B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPVL-CC01
LED Display
Display frequency, current,
voltage and error, etc.
Part Number
Status Display
Display of driver status
Parameter Unit Key
Enable the keypad
it can determine the source of
RUN/STOP
Value Modification Key
Used on the modification
for settings and parameters
PROG/DATA
Used to enter programming parameters
MODE Selection Key
Press this key to view different
operating values
Pulse/minus Key
Number Key
JOG Operation Key
Press this key to execute
the JOG frequency operation
Used to enter settings
FWD/REV Direction Key
RUN key
STOP/RESET
Backward key
Display message
FREQ. ESET POI NTEE
S EEEEE60. 00HzEE
Display the setting of message
Display of driver status
S=Stop
R=Run
F=Fault
=Forward running
=Reverse running
Display Message
Descriptions
FREQ. ESET POI NTEE
S
EEEEE60 . 0 0Hz EE
Displays the AC drive Master Frequency
Press MODE key
OUTPUT EFREQ. EEEE
Displays the actual output frequency present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3
S
EEEEEE0 . 0 0Hz EE
Press MODE key
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Display Message
Descriptions
DC- BUSEVOLTAGEEE
REEEEEE71 6. 0Vdc E
Displays the voltage of DC BUS
Press MODE key
OUTPUT ECURRENTEE
SEEEEEEE0 . 0 0 Amp s
Displays the output current present at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3
Displays the output voltage of motor
Press MODE key
OUTPUT EVOLTAGEEE
SEEEEEEEE0. 0Vo l t
Press MODE key
U: Ou t p u t ECu r r en t
SEEEEEEE0 . 0 Amps E
User defined unit (Where U= Pr.00-04)
Press MODE key
Copy the first set of parameter groups from the drive to the keypad. It can
save two sets of parameter groups to keypad. (one set is from group 0 to
group 13)
PARAMECOPYEEEEEE
SEEEREADE1EEEEEE
Save the first set of parameter groups from the keypad to other drive.
The firmware version is 1.00.
PARAMECOPYEEEEEE
SEEESAVEE1Ev 1 . 0 0
SYSTEMEPARAMETER
S0 - EEEEEEEE0 0 - EE
Displays the group number
Ra t e dECur r e nt EEE
EEEEEEEE2 7. 10 Amp
Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter
External Fault
Ex t e r n a l EFa ul t EE
FEEEFau l t o de : 6 0
C
Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by
pressing PROG/DATA key. After a parameter value has been set, the new
value is automatically stored in memory.
EEE- - EEnd . E- - EEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
EEE- - EEr r . E- - EEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.
B-18
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.7.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad KPVL-CC01
Selection Mode
To set parameters
FREQ. ESETPOI NTEE
SEEEEEE6 0. 0 0Hz EE
SYSTEMEPARAMETER
S0 - EEEEEEEE00 - EE
OUTPUTEFREQ. EEEE
SEEEEEE0 0. 0 0Hz EE
Rat ed ECu r r en t EEE
S0- 00 =EEEEE0 0- 0 1
DC- BUSEVOLTAGEEE
SEEEEEE25 3. 0 Vd c E
Rat d ECu r r en t EEE
S0- 00 =E2 7. 10 Amp s
OUTPUT ECURRENTEE
SEEEEEEE0 . 0 0 Amp s
Par amet e r ERe s e t E
S0- 02 =EEEEE0 0- 0 2
OUTPUT EVOL TAGEEE
SEEEEEEEE0 . 0 Vo l t
Par amet e r ERe s e t E
S0- 02 =E1 0E10 0EEE
U: Ou t p u t ECu r r e nt
SEEEEEEE0 . 0 Amps E
EEE- -
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
E
End . E- - EEE
return to the
start-up display
In the selection mode, press
to set the parameters.
Par amet e r ERe s e t E
S0- 02 =EEEEE0 0- 0 2
return to the
previous display
In the parameters mode, it will
display parameters and
parameters definitions
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
To copy parameters
From KPVL-CC01 to drive
From drive to KPVL-CC01
PARAMECOPYCOPYEE
SEEEREADE1EEEEEE
PARAMECOPYEEEEEE
SEEESAVEE1 Ev 1. 0 0
Press
for about 5 seconds
and hold on
Press
for about 5 seconds
and hold on
PARAMECOPYE PYE
SEEEREADE1 EEEEEE
PARAMECOPYEEPEYEEE
SEEESAVEE1 Ev 1. 0 0
When "READ 1" starts blinking,
it starts to save to KPVL-CC01.
When "SAVE 1" starts
blinking, it starts to save
to KPVL-CC01. V1.00 is
the firmware version.It
fails to save to KPVL-CC01
when it displays V --.--.
It needs to save parameters
from drive to KPVL-CC01 first.
PARAMECOPYEEEEEE
SEEEREADE1EEEEEE
Finish to save parameters
PARAMECOPYEEEEEE
SEEESAVEE1 Ev 1. 0 0
FREQ. ESETPOI NTEE
SEEEEE60 . 0 0 EHz EE
When entering error
parameters setting
Pa r a met er ERe s e t E
S0 - 0 2 =E16 EE0 0- 02
EEE- - EEr r . E- - EEE
EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
Pa r a met er ERe s e t E
S0 - 0 2 =E16 EE0 0- 02
Enter parameter
settings
Par ame t e r ERes et E
S0- 02 =E1 6EE00 - 0 2
Please re-enter the correct value
when the setting is blinking.
Pa r a met er ERe s e t E
S0 - 0 2 =E16 E16 - 02
B-20
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.7.3 Dimension of the Digital Keypad
Unit: mm [inch]
B.7.4 Recommended Position the Rubber Magnet of the Digital
Keypad
This rubber magnet is shipped with the digital keypad. Users can adhere to anywhere of
the back of the digital keypad to stick on the case of the AC motor drive. Please don’t stick
on the communication port to prevent reducing magnetic force.
rubber
magnet
KPV L-C C01
RU
N
STOP
JO G FWD RE
V
EX
T
P
U
rubber
magnet
PU
PRO
G
+/ -
7
MODE
D
ATA
JOG
FWD
8
5
2
0
9
4
6
3
R
EV
LABEL
RUN
STO P
1
.
R
ESET
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.8 PG Card (for Encoder)
B.8.1 EMVL-PGABL
B/O Z/O VP
A
A
B
B
Z
Z
B/O Z/O 0V
U
U
V
V
W
W
1. Terminals descriptions
Terminal Symbols
Descriptions
Specifications
Power source of encoder (use Voltage: +5V±0.5V or +12V±1V
VP
SW2 to switch 12V/5V)
Current: 200mA max.
Power source common for
encoder
Reference level of the power of
encoder
0V
Line driver RS422
A,A, B,B, Z,Z
Incremental line driver input
Max. input frequency: 100 kHz
Absolute line driver input (UVW Line driver RS422
U,U, V, V, W, W
3-bit code)
Max. input frequency: 50 kHz
Signal output for PG feedback
card and can be used as a
frequency divider.
A/O,
/O,
A/O, B/O,B
Line driver RS422
Z/O, Z/O
Max. output frequency: 100 kHz
Connected to the grounding of the
power of the AC motor drive and
used for PG shielding
Grounding
B-22
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
2. Wire length
Types of Pulse
Generators
Maximum Wire Length
100m
Wire Gauge
Line Driver
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
3. Types of Pulse Generators (Encoders)
Line driver
Q
Q
VP
0V
A
EMVL-PGABL
Encoder
PG
A
B
B
Z
Z
0V
U
A/O
A/O
B/O
U
V
V
W
W
B/O
Z/O
Z/O
4. Output Signal Setting of the Frequency Divider
It generates the output signal of division factor RESERVE: reserved bit (PIN1)
“n” after dealing with the input pulse. Please
set by the switch SW1 on the card.
pulse (PIN 2)
I/MODE: input type setting of the division
O/MODE: output type setting of the division
pulse (PIN 3)
Division Factor
RST: clock reset bit (PIN 4)
Division factor: setting for division factor n:
1~256 (PIN5~12)
ON
1
0
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Settings and explanations
Division factor
A leads B
B leads A
A-/A
B-/B
A-/A
B-/B
X
0
0
1
A/O-/A/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
B/O-/B/O
A-/A
B-/B
A-/A
B-/B
X
0
1
1
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A-/A
A-/A
B-/B
B-/B
X
1
X
1
A/O-/A/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
B/O-/B/O
NOTE
„ When the switch is ON, it means logic 0.
„ A-/A and B-/B are the input signals of PG card. A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the line driver
outputs of the frequency divider measured by the differential probe.
„ PIN1 is reserved.
„ PIN 5~12 are the denominator for the frequency divider. PIN 5 is the low bit (EX: the
setting of XXXX10101010 is that the input signal divides by 85).
B-24
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
„ When PIN 2 and PIN 3 are set to 0, the input signals (A-/A and B-/B) of PG card should
be square wave and A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the outputs of frequency divider.
„ When PIN 2 is set to 0 and PIN 3 is set to 1, the input signals (A-/A and B-/B) of PG card
should be square wave and B/O-/B/O is the indication of phase A and B. (EX: LOW
means A leads B and HIGH means B leads A). A/O-/A/O is the output of frequency
divider.
„ When PIN 2 is set to 1 and PIN 3 is set to X, B-/B should be the input signal of direction
indication. (EX: when B-/B is LOW, it means that A leads B. When B-/B is HIGH, it means
that B leads A. A-/A is a square wave input. B/O-/B/O and B-/B should be input
synchronously. A/O-/A/O is the output of frequency divider.
„ Z/O-/Z/O of the PG card will act by the input signal of Z-/Z and don’t have the function of
frequency divider.
„ When changing the denominator of the frequency divider or input/output type, it needs to
clear the counter value by clock reset bit (PIN4) before operation. Please set the switch to
1 after reset.
B.8.2 EMVL-PGABO
3.
Terminals descriptions
Terminal Symbols
Descriptions
Specifications
Voltage: +12V±1V
VP
Power source of encoder
Current: 200mA max.
Power source common for
encoder
Reference level of the power of
encoder
0V
Open collector signal input.
Max. bandwidth is 100kHz
A,A, B,B, Z,Z
Incremental line driver input
Please notice that A,B,Z
and
0V should be short circuit.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Terminal Symbols
Descriptions
Specifications
Line driver RS422
Signal output for PG feedback
card and can be used as a
frequency divider.
A/O,
/O,
A/O, B/O,B
Z/O, Z/O
Max. output frequency: 100 kHz
Connected to the grounding of the
power of the AC motor drive and
used for PG shielding
Grounding
2. Wire length
Output Type of the
Encoder
Maximum Wire Length
50m
Wire Gauge
Open collector
1.25mm2 (AWG16) or above
3. Output Type of Encoder
Open collector
VCC
O/P
0V
EMVL-PGABO
VP
0V
A
Encoder
PG
A
B
B
Z
Z
A/O
A/O
B/O
B/O
Z/O
Z/O
B-26
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
4. Output Signal Setting of the Frequency Divider
It generates the output signal of division factor RESERVE: reserved bit (PIN1)
“n” after dealing with the input pulse. Please
set by the switch SW1 on the card.
pulse (PIN 2)
I/MODE: input type setting of the division
O/MODE: output type setting of the division
pulse (PIN 3)
Division Factor
RST: clock reset bit (PIN 4)
Division factor: setting for division factor n:
1~256 (PIN5~12)
ON
1
0
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
Settings and explanations
Division factor
B leads A
A leads B
A-/A
A-/A
B-/B
B-/B
X
0
0
1
A/O-/A/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
B/O-/B/O
A-/A
A-/A
B-/B
B-/B
X
0
1
1
A/O-/A/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A-/A
B/O-/B/O
A-/A
B-/B
B-/B
X
1
X
1
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
NOTE
„ When the switch is ON, it means logic 0.
„ A-/A and B-/B are the input signals of PG card. A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the line driver
outputs of the frequency divider measured by the differential probe.
„ PIN1 is reserved.
„ PIN 5~12 are the denominator for the frequency divider. PIN 5 is the low bit (EX: the
setting of XXXX10101010 is that the input signal divides by 85).
„ When PIN 2 and PIN 3 are set to 0, the input signals (A-/A and B-/B) of PG card should
be square wave and A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the outputs of frequency divider.
„ When PIN 2 is set to 0 and PIN 3 is set to 1, the input signals (A-/A and B-/B) of PG card
should be square wave and B/O-/B/O is the indication of phase A and B. (EX: LOW
means A leads B and HIGH means B leads A). A/O-/A/O is the output of frequency
divider.
„ When PIN 2 is set to 1 and PIN 3 is set to X, B-/B should be the input signal of direction
indication. (EX: when B-/B is LOW, it means that A leads B. When B-/B is HIGH, it means
that B leads A. A-/A is a square wave input. B/O-/B/O and B-/B should be input
synchronously. A/O-/A/O is the output of frequency divider.
„ Z/O-/Z/O of the PG card will act by the input signal of Z-/Z and don’t have the function of
frequency divider.
„ When changing the denominator of the frequency divider or input/output type, it needs to
clear the counter value by clock reset bit (PIN4) before operation. Please set the switch to
1 after reset.
B.8.3 EMVL-PGH01 (only for Heidenhain ERN1387)
1. Sinusoidal Encoder Function
B-28
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
VFD-VL series
Vdc
GND
+5V
0V
5
4
3
8
2
1
A+
A-
10
9
7
6
15 14 13 12 11
B+
B-
Terminal
Name
B-
Terminal
Name
+5V
SIN
SIN’
COS
COS’
NC
900el.
Pin NO
Pin NO
Z+
Z-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NC
Z+
Z-
A+
A-
0V
B+
10
11
12
13
14
15
SIN
SIN'
COS
COS'
NC
900mech.
Heidenhain ERN1387
B
A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Terminal
Pin NO
Name
Terminal
Pin NO
Name
UP
C-
C+
D+
D-
5a
NC
4b
4a
6a
2a
5b
3b
B-
NC
R+
R-
A+
A-
1b
1a
7b
2b
6a
-
-
0V
B+
-
-
2. Terminals descriptions
Terminal Symbols
Descriptions
Specifications
Voltage: +5V±0.5V
Specific power output of
encoder
+5V
0V
Current: 200mA max.
Power source common for
encoder
Reference level of the power of
encoder
3600el.
0.8....1.2Vss
(~1Vss; Z0=120
~
0
A
)
900el.
Sine line driver input
(incremental signal)
A+, A-, B+, B-,
Z+, Z-
0
0
B
Z
0.2V....0.85V
(~
~
0.5V; Z0=120
)
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Terminal Symbols
Descriptions
Specifications
3600mech.
0.8....1.2Vss
0
0
SIN
(~
1Vss; Z0=1k
)
~
Sine line driver input signal
(absolute signal)
SIN, SIN’,
COS, COS’
900mech.
COS
Signal output for PG feedback
card and can be used as a
frequency divider.
A/O,
/O,
A/O, B/O,B
Line driver RS422
Z/O, Z/O
Max. output frequency: 100 kHz
EMVL-PGH01
VP
0V
A+
Encoder
PG
A-
B+
B-
Z+
Z-
SIN
A/O
A/O
B/O
SIN'
COS
COS'
B/O
Z/O
Z/O
4. Output Signal Setting of the Frequency Divider
It generates the output signal of division factor RESERVE: reserved bit (PIN1)
“n” after dealing with the input pulse. Please
set by the switch SW1 on the card.
pulse (PIN 2)
I/MODE: input type setting of the division
O/MODE: output type setting of the division
pulse (PIN 3)
Division Factor
RST: clock reset bit (PIN 4)
Division factor: setting for division factor n:
1~256 (PIN5~12)
ON
1
0
1
4
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12
B-30
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Settings and explanations
Division factor
A leads B
B leads A
A
B
A
B
X
0
0
1
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A
B
A
B
X
X
0
1
1
1
1
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
This setting is NOT for EMVL-PGH01
X
NOTE
„ When the switch is ON, it means logic 0.
„ A-/A and B-/B are the input signals of PG card. A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the line drivers
of the frequency divider measured by the differential probe.
„ PIN1 is reserved.
„ PIN 5~12 are the denominator for the frequency divider. PIN 5 is the low bit (EX: the
setting of XXXX10101010 is that the input signal divides by 85).
„ When PIN 2 and PIN 3 are set to 0, the input signals (A-/A and B-/B) of PG card should
be square wave and A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the outputs of frequency divider.
„ When PIN 2 is set to 0 and PIN 3 is set to 1, the input signals (A-/A and B-/B) of PG card
should be square wave and B/O-/B/O is the indication of phase A and B. (EX: LOW
means A leads B and HIGH means B leads A). A/O-/A/O is the output of frequency
divider.
„ When PIN 2 is set to 1 and PIN 3 is set to X, B-/B should be the input signal of direction
indication. (EX: when B-/B is LOW, it means that A leads B. When B-/B is HIGH, it means
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
that B leads A. A-/A is a square wave input. B/O-/B/O and B-/B should be input
synchronously. A/O-/A/O is the output of frequency divider.
„ Z/O-/Z/O of the PG card will act by the input signal of Z-/Z and don’t have the function of
frequency divider.
„ When changing the denominator of the frequency divider or input/output type, it needs to
clear the counter value by clock reset bit (PIN4) before operation. Please set the switch to
1 after reset.
B.8.4 EMVL-PGS01
Applicable encoders for EMVL-PGS01:
„ EnDat2.1: EQN425, EQN1325, ECN113, ECN413, ECN1113, ECN1313
„ HIPERFACE: SRS50/60
1. Pin description
VFD-VL Series
VFD-VL Series
Corresponding terminal
Pin No.
1
2
EnDat
B-
0V
HIPERFACE®
REFSIN
0V
4
3
1
5
2
6
10
9
8
7
13 12
15 14
11
3
0V
0V
4
0V
0V
5
6
7
A+
A-
0V
+COS
REFCOS
0V
8
9
B+
VP
+SIN
VP
10
11
12
13
14
15
Data+
Data-
CLOCK+
CLOCK-
VP
Data+
Data-
-
-
VP
0V
0V
B-32
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
EMVL-PGS01
VP
0V
A+ (+COS)
Encoder
PG
A- (REFCOS)
B+ (+SIN)
B- (REFSIN)
A/O
A/O
B/O
B/O
OA
Data+
Data-
CLOCK+
CLOCK-
OB
GND
2. Terminals descriptions
Terminal Symbols
Descriptions
Specifications
J3
VP
0V
Power source of encoder
(use SW2 to switch 12V/5V) Current: 250mA max.
Power source common for
encoder
Voltage: +5VDC±5% or +8.3 VDC±6%
Reference level of the power of encoder
A+, A-,
B+, B-
Sine line drive input
(incremental signal)
Input frequency: 40kHz max.
3600el.
0.8....1.2Vss
0
0
A
B
(~
1Vss; Z0=120
)
~
900el.
+SIN, +COS Sine line drive input
Input frequency: 20kHz max.
REFSIN,
REFCOS
(incremental signal)
SIN
0.9...1.1V
REFSIN/REFCOS
CLOCK+,
CLOCK-
CLOCK line drive output
Line Driver RS422 Level output
Data+, Data-
RS485 communication interface
Terminal resistor: about 130 Ω
TB1
Signal output for PG
feedback card and can be
used as a frequency divider.
A/O,
B/O,
/O,
/O
A
B
Line Driver RS422 Level output
TB2 OA
OB
Open collector output signal ・Transistor open collector output
and can be used as a
frequency divider
・Max. 24VDC, 30mA
・VOL≦1.5V(IOL=30mA)
・IOH≦200μA(VOH=24VDC)
GND
Open collector output
common
Reference level of NPN transistor open
collector output
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Terminal Symbols
J4
Descriptions
Grounding
Specifications
Connected to the grounding of the power
of the AC motor drive and used for PG
shielding
4. Output Signal Setting of the Frequency Divider
It generates the output signal of division factor O/MODE: output type setting of the division
“n” after dealing with the input pulse. Please
set by the switch SW1 on the card.
pulse
RST: clock reset bit
Division Factor
Division factor: setting for division factor n:
1~31
ON
1
ON
1
0
1
4
2
3
5
Settings and explanations
Division factor
A leads B
B leads A
A
B
A
B
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
0
OA-GND
OB-GND
OA-GND
OB-GND
A
B
A
B
A/O-/A/O
B/O-/B/O
A/O-/A/O
1
B/O-/B/O
OA-GND
OA-GND
OB-GND
OB-GND
B-34
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
NOTE
„ When the switch is ON, it means logic 0.
„ A-/A and B-/B are the input signals of PG card. A/O-/A/O and B/O-/B/O are the line driver
outputs of the frequency divider measured by the differential probe.
„ Bit 0-4 are the denominators for the frequency divider. Bit 0 is the low bit (EX: the setting
of 10110 is that the input signal divides by 13).
„ When the output pulse type of frequency divider is set to 0, A/O-/A/O, B/O-/B/O, OA-GND
and OB-GND are the outputs of frequency divider.
„ When the output pulse type of frequency divider is set to 1, B/O-/B/O and OB-GND are
the indication of phase A and B. (EX: LOW means A leads B and HIGH means B leads A).
A/O-/A/O and OA-GND are the output of frequency dividers.
„ When changing the denominator of the frequency divider or output type, it needs to clear
the counter value by clock reset bit before operation.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.9 AMD-EMI Filter Cross Reference
AC Drives
Model Number
FootPrint
VFD055VL43A, VFD075VL43A, VFD110VL43A,
RF110B43CA
Y
N
VFD055VL23A, VFD075VL23A, VFD150V43A,
VFD185VL43A
50TDS4W4C
VFD110VL23A, VFD150VL23A, VFD220VL43A,
VFD300VL43A, VFD370VL43A
N
100TDS84C
200TDDS84C
150TDS84C
180TDS84C
VFD550VL43A, VFD750VL43A
N
N
N
VFD185VL23A, VFD220VL23A, VFD300VL23A,
VFD450VL43A,
VFD370VL23A,
Installation
All electrical equipment, including AC motor drives, will generate high-frequency/low-frequency
noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when in operation. By
using an EMI filter with correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is recommended
to use DELTA EMI filter to have the best interference elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC motor drive and EMI filter are installed
and wired according to user manual:
„
EN61000-6-4
„
„
EN61800-3: 1996
EN55011 (1991) Class A Group 1
General precaution
1.
2.
EMI filter and AC motor drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
Please install AC motor drive on footprint EMI filter or install EMI filter as close as possible to
the AC motor drive.
3.
4.
5.
Please wire as short as possible.
Metal plate should be grounded.
The cover of EMI filter and AC motor drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate and
the contact area should be as large as possible.
Choose suitable motor cable and precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be sure to
observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
B-36
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
1.
2.
Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).
The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum length
and maximum contact area.
3.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding.
Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with
the plate and shielding.
saddle
the plate with grounding
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
The length of motor cable
When motor is driven by an AC motor drive of PWM type, the motor terminals will experience surge
voltages easily due to components conversion of AC motor drive and cable capacitance. When the
motor cable is very long (especially for the 460V series), surge voltages may reduce insulation
quality. To prevent this situation, please follow the rules below:
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
„ Use a motor with enhanced insulation.
„ Connect an output reactor (optional) to the output terminals of the AC motor drive
„ The length of the cable between AC motor drive and motor should be as short as possible
(10 to 20 m or less)
„ For models 7.5hp/5.5kW and above:
Insulation level of motor
460VAC input voltage
230VAC input voltage
1000V
1300V
1600V
66 ft (20m)
328 ft (100m)
1312 ft (400m)
1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m) 1312 ft (400m)
NOTE
When a thermal O/L relay protected by motor is used between AC motor drive and motor, it may
malfunction (especially for 460V series), even if the length of motor cable is only 165 ft (50m) or less.
To prevent it, please use AC reactor and/or lower the carrier frequency (Pr. 00-17 PWM carrier
frequency).
NOTE
Never connect phase lead capacitors or surge absorbers to the output terminals of the AC motor
drive.
„ If the length is too long, the stray capacitance between cables will increase and may
cause leakage current. It will activate the protection of over current, increase leakage
current or not insure the correction of current display. The worst case is that AC motor
drive may damage.
„ If more than one motor is connected to the AC motor drive, the total wiring length is the
sum of the wiring length from AC motor drive to each motor.
B.9.1 Dimensions
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
B-38
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: RF110B43CA
60
33
200
120
382
382
398
20
26
7.0
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 50TDS4W4C
Order P/N: 100TDS84C
B-40
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 200TDDS84C
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: 150TDS84C
Order P/N: 180TDS84C
B-42
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10 EMVL-IOA01
AVO1 AGND MO10 MO9 MO8
MCM MO7 MO6 MO5 MO4 MO3
Terminals
Descriptions
AVO1-AGND
AVO2-AGND
Multifunction analog voltage output terminal
-10.0V~10.0V
The analog output is defined by Pr.03-17 and Pr.03-20.
MO3~MO10
The AC motor drive outputs every monitor signal, such as
operation indication, frequency attained and overload indication by
the transistor (open collector). Refer to Pr.02-15~02-22
multifunction output terminals for details.
Multifunction output
terminals
(photocoupler)
Max: +24V/5mA
RL
MO3~MO10
MCM
internal circuit
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.11 Safety Relay EMVL-SAF01
B.11.1 Functions of the Terminals
Terminals
Descriptions
Specifications
J1
S1 +24VDC power Input
・Min. activation voltage: +19Vdc
・Impedance: 720+10%Ω
S2 +24VDC, reference
level of the power
・Rated power: about 800mW
S3 A dry contact of a relay
S4 A dry contact of a relay
・Rated current: 8 A
・Rated voltage/max. switch voltage: 240/400 VAC
・Contact material: AgSnO2
・Contact impedance:
≦100 mOhm / 1 A / 24 VDC
≦20 Ohm / 10 mA / 5 VDC
・Mechanical endurance: 10x106 cycles
・Rated operation frequency: 6 min-1 / 150 min-1
(loaded/unloaded)
B.11.2 Wiring of the Safety Relay
Relay
contact
S4
S3
S2
connect to JP19
on the control board
-
+
S1
B-44
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Descriptions
1.
2.
When the power +24VDC is applied to S1 and S2 (S1 is +), the relay contacts of S3 and S4 are
ON. When the power +24VDC isn’t applied to S1 and S2, the relay contacts of S3 and S4 are
OFF. At the meanwhile, EMVL-ASF01 can stop the output of the AC motor drive by connecting
to JP19 on the control board. It can also be used with MI8 to achieve two safety-loop
protections via hardware.
Multifunction input MI8
(1) Please remove JP1 from the control board before using safety-loop function. At the
meanwhile, the multifunction input MI8 can control the output of the AC motor drive.
(2) operation method:
MI8 is ON: the AC motor drive can output
MI8 is OFF: the AC motor drive can’t output
NOTE: Please insert JP1 into the control board when this function is disabled.
Safety-Relay EMVL-SAF01
3.
(1) Please connect the power of J3 to JP19 on the control board and remove JP18 on the
control board.
(2) Operation method:
When the power is applied to S1-S2: It is ON and the AC motor drive can output
When the power isn’t applied to S1-S2: it is OFF and the AC motor drive can’t output
(3) S3-S4 are the monitor contacts and user can check the safety-loop by this contact.
NOTE
„ Please notice that when J3 of relay board is connected to JP19 of control board, JP18
must be removed when using EMVL-SAF01.
„ Please supply the power +24VDC to S1 and S2 before the AC motor drive is powered on
to drive relay.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
B-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
This page intentionally left blank
B-46
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence
on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to
the motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer
the required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed,
power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider,
depending on your requirements.
Related Specification
Speed and
torque
characteristics
Item
Time
ratings
Overload
capacity
Starting
torque
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Inertia load
●
●
Load type
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Constant output
Decreasing torque
Decreasing output
Constant load
Load speed and
torque
characteristics
●
●
●
Shock load
Load
characteristics
●
●
●
●
Repetitive load
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
●
●
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
●
●
Maximum frequency, Base frequency
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
●
●
●
●
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring
Duty cycle modification
●
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C.1 Capacity Formulas
1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
⎛
⎞
k × N
973×η × cosϕ
GD2
N
⎜
⎜
⎟
⎟
TL +
×
≤1.5×the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
375 tA
⎝
⎠
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
≦
„ Acceleration time 60 seconds
The starting capacity=
⎡
[n
T
+ ns(ks
− 1)] = PC1 1+
(
k
s
− 1)⎤⎥⎥ ≤1.5×the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
k × N
η × cosϕ
n
s
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
⎥
⎦
nT
≧
„ Acceleration time 60 seconds
The starting capacity=
⎡
[
n
T
+ ns(ks
− 1)]= PC1 1+
(
k
s
− 1)⎤⎥⎥ ≤ the_capacity _of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
k × N
η ×cosϕ
n
s
⎢
⎢
⎢
⎣
⎥
⎦
nT
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
≦
„ Acceleration time 60 seconds
⎡
⎤
n
S
nT
+ IM 1+ ⎛⎜ kS −1⎟⎞⎥ ≤1.5×the_ rated _current _of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
⎢
⎝
⎠
⎦
n
T
⎣
≧
„ Acceleration time 60 seconds
⎡
⎤
n
S
n
T
+ IM 1+ ⎛⎜ kS −1⎟⎞⎥ ≤ the _ rated _current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
⎢
⎝
⎠
⎦
n
T
⎣
C-2
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
2.3 When it is running continuously
„ The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k × PM
η ×cosϕ
≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
„ The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k × 3 ×VM × IM ×10−3 ≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _motor_drive(kVA)
„ The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k × IM ≤ the_ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
Symbol explanation
: Motor shaft output for load (kW)
PM
η
: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
: Motor rated voltage(V)
cosϕ
V
M
: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
IM
: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on
PWM method)
k
: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
: Starting current/rated current of motor
: Number of motors in parallel
: Number of simultaneously started motors
: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
: Load torque
PC1
kS
n
n
T
S
GD2
TL
: Motor acceleration time
t
A
N
: Motor speed
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C.2 General Precaution
Selection Note
1.
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents
may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid
this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the
current and improve the input power efficiency.
2.
3.
When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single
AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated
currents).
The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current
and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.
(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If
higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.)
use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor
and the AC Motor Drive.
4.
When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor
Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an
external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note
1.
The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some
models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For
safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may
cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is
recommended.
2.
3.
4.
Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended
to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a
certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the
C-4
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and
the AC Motor Drive.
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the
following precautions:
1.
2.
The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor
temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the
motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.
3.
4.
When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be
decreased.
The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
Load duty-cycle
25%
40%
60%
100
82
70
60
continuous
50
0
3 6 20
Frequency (Hz)
60
5.
6.
7.
If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special
inverter duty motor.
Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating
speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power
supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
connected.
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
8.
Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
„ Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount
equipment that runs at varying speed.
„ Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher
frequency.
„ To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9.
The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1.
Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number
the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or
regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
Submersible motor:
2.
3.
4.
5.
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between
AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex)
requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special
precautions.
Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation
will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time
at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check
before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing
the motor.
C-6
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes,
belts and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and
above, lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial
mains power are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
AC motor drive
Motor
180
180
155
60 seconds
continuous
60 seconds
155
140
continuous
100
80
100
55
38
55
38
0
0
320
320
60
60
120
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/f for 220V/60Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/f for 220V/60Hz
180
150
60 seconds
continuous
60 seconds
continuous
140
130
100
85
68
100
80
45
35
45
35
0
0
320
20
50
50
120
3
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/f for 220V/50Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/f for 220V/50Hz
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
This page intentionally left blank.
C-8
Revision Nov. 2008, VLE1, SW V1.03
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|